Citroen C5 Owners Handbook 1

7/17/2019 Citroen C5 Owners Handbook 1

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/citroen-c5-owners-handbook-1 1/315



4

F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

E X T E R I O R

The Xenon dual-function directionalheadlamps

This function automatically provides you withextra visibility on bends. This lighting is linkedwith the angular lighting which maximises thearea lit at intersections and when parking.

Lane departure warning system

This driving assistance devicewarns you when you unwittinglycross a lane marking.

Parking assistance

(visual + sound)This function warns you if anobstacle is detected in front of orbehind the vehicle.

Tyre deflation detection

This function checks the pressureof the tyres automatically whiledriving.

Glass panoramic roof (Tourer)

This provides you with perfect brightness in thepassenger compartment.

Glass sun roof (Saloon)

This also provides you with improved ventilation in thepassenger compartment.

88 79-80

142 145 111



A. Key release/storage.

B. Normal locking of the vehicle (a singlepress) or deadlocking of the vehicle(two presses in succession).

C. Guide-me-home lighting.

D. Unlocking of the vehicle.

To open the fuel flap, press on the topleft part of it, then pull from the edge.

Press upwards on the lever E .

Opening the boot

76-77

81

O P E N I N G

Remote control key Fuel tank

64

Locking filler cap

Turn the key a quarter turn to lockand unlock the filler cap.

When refuelling, place the cap on hook F .

Tank capacity: approximately 71 litres.The boot automatically locks when thevehicle is moving at a speed of over6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic cen-tral locking is deactivated. It is unlockedwhen a door is opened or when the cen-tral locking button is pressed (speed

lower than 6 mph (10 km/h).



6

F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

This operation should only be per-formed while the vehicle is stationary.

Open the driver's door.

Pull release lever A to unlock.

Bonnet release

O P E N I N G

Lift up lever B , then raise the bonnet.

Saloon

Tourer

Spare wheel

The tools are to be found in a protectiveholder inside the spare wheel.

165

Access to the spare wheel

To access the spare wheel:

Lift up the boot floor using the strap(Saloon) or the retractable hook(Tourer).

Fold back the boot carpet (Saloon).

Attach the hook to the upper sectionof the boot.

To remove the spare wheel, detachthe strap then push the wheel for-wards, before lifting it out.

Puncture kit

The puncture repair kit is a completesystem including a compressor and asetting product.

161

150



123

I N T E R I O R

Electronic parking brake

The electronic parking brake combines automatic engagement whenthe engine is switched off, and automatic release when the vehicle isset in motion (automatic function activated by default).

Manual locking/unlocking is possible.

Parking space sensor

The "Parking space sensor" func-tion assists you in finding a parkingspace.

Dual-zone automatic air conditioning

This air conditioning system enables you toadjust the comfort levels of the driver and thefront passenger independently.

Audio and communication systems

This equipment benefits from the latest tech-nology: MP3 compatible radio, Bluetooth® hands-free kit, NaviDrive 3D, MyWay.

48 207

143



8

F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

D A S H B O A R D

1. Electric windows/rear view mirrors/Child safetycontrols.

2. Memorisation of driver’s seat and rear view mirrorssettings.

3. Bonnet release.

4. Controls at the steering wheel:

- Speed limiter

- Cruise control

5. Horn.

6. Audio/telematic controls under steering wheel.

7. Driver's airbag.

8. Navigation controls for the audio/telematics andtrip computer systems.

9. Driver's air vent.

10. Instrument panel.

11. Driver's air vent.12. Windscreen wiper/screen wash controls.

13. Ignition switch.

14. ESP/parking assistance/lane departure warningsystem controls.

15. Steering column adjustment.

16. Knees airbag.

17. Oddments tray or programmable heater controls.

Fusebox access flap.

18. Checks/Anti-intrusion alarm/Parking space sensorcontrols.

19. Lighting/Direction indicators/Foglamp/Voicerecognition controls.

20. Manual headlamp height adjustment.



D A S H B O A R D

1. Sunlight sensor.

2. Soft diffusion air conditioning adjustment knob.

3. Passenger's airbag.

4. Side window demister.

5. Ignition key in the glovebox:

- Passenger’s airbag activation/deactivation6. Passenger's air vents.

7. Hazard lamps button.

8. Glovebox:

- Vehicle document storage

- Audio-video sockets

9. Doors and boot locking/unlocking control.

Programmable heating indicator.

10. Automatic gearbox SPORT/SNOW mode controls.

11. Electronic parking brake.

12. USB reader socket.

13. Armrest with cup-holder.

14. Suspension controls:

- Ground clearance adjustment

- Sport mode

15. Ashtray with lighter.

16. Gear lever.

17. Storage.

18. Audio and telematics system.

19. Air conditioning controls.

20. Storage.

21. Multifunction screen.



F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

Audio.

Instrument panel menu. Multifunction screen menu.

Telephone.

Cruise control andspeed limiter.

The "SET +, PAUSE, VOL+, MUTE "buttons have touch-sensitive identifica-tion to make them easier to use.

Activation of voicerecognition or reminder of

navigation guidance.

MODE: selection of the typeof information displayed on

multifunction screen.

136



G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

1. Seat cushion height, angle and slideadjustments.

2. Adjustment of the backrest angle.

3. Adjustment of top of backrest.

4. Adjustment of 1 axis lumbar support.

5. Massage function.

6. Heated seat control.

A. Adjustment of the backrest angle.B. Adjustment of the seat height.

C. Heated seat control.

D. Longitudinal adjustment of seat.

E. Adjustment of the backrest lumbarsupport.

Memorisation

The Memorisation function allows you toprogramme the driver’s seat, rear viewmirrors and air conditioning settings.

The correct position of the upper seatbelt anchorage places the belt across

the middle of the shoulder. To adjust the seat belt for height,

compress the control and slide it inthe desired direction.

Seat belt height adjustmentFront seats

Electrical adjustmentsManual adjustments

56

57

116

59



F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Electrochrome interior rearview mirror

Unlock the steering wheel by pushingcontrol A forwards.

Adjust the height and the reach ofthe steering wheel, then lock the po-

sition by pulling the lever upwards.

Steering column adjustmentElectric exterior rear viewmirrors

1. Selection of rear view mirror:

A. Left hand side.

B. Right hand side.C. Foldback/Deployment.

2. Directional control for mirror se-lected .

61

Operation

Switch on the ignition and press

button 4 .- Warning lamp 3 on: automatic mode.

- Warning lamp 3 off: automaticmode stopped. The mirror remainsin its lightest definition.

62

63

As a safety precaution, these opera-tions must not be carried out whilemoving.



V I S I B I L I T Y

Front wipers

Control positions

2 Rapid wipe.

1 Normal wipe.I Intermittent wipe.

0 Off.

Lighting

Sidelamps.

Dipped beams/main beams.

Lamps off.

Pull the control stalk towards you to change between dipped beamand main beam.

Front foglamps and rearfoglamps on.

Front foglamps on.

Automatic lighting of headlamps.

Rear wipers (Tourer)

Rotate control C to the desired posi-tion.

Off

Intermittent wipe

Screen wash

Ring A

Ring B

83

Screen wash

Pull the screen wipe control stalktowards you.

89-90

89

One press downwards:

- AUTO: Automatic wipe activated.

- Single wipe.

If the ignition has been switched offfor around 1 minute, it is necessary toreactivate automatic wiping.



F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

V E N T I L A T I O N

Dual zone automatic air conditioning

Adjustment of airdistribution on driver's side.

Passenger's sideautomatic operation.

Adjustment of temperatureon driver's side.

Adjustment of air distributionon passenger's side.

Rear and external rear view

mirrors demisting - deicing.

Air recirculation - entry of

air from outside.

Front demisting - deicing.

Driver's side automaticoperation.

It is recommended to use automatic mode by pressing on the "AUTO" button.

Adjustment of temperatureon passenger's side.

Activation/deactivation ofair conditioning.

Adjusting the air flow.

48



M O N I T O R I N G

Instrument panel

The hazard lamps can alsobe used with the ignition

switched off.

A. Fuel gauge and low fuel warning lamp.

B. Cruise control/speed limiter information.

C. Coolant temperature.

D. Speed indicator.

E. Instrument panel.

F. Mileage recorder.

G. Trip mileage recorder reset button.

H. Rev counter.

I. Engine oil temperature.

J. Display of automatic gearbox information.

- When the ignition is switched on, the orange andred warning lamps light up.

- When the engine is running, these warning lampsshould go out.

- If any warning lamps remain lit, refer to the"Instruments and controls" section.

Hazard warning lamps

22

110



16

F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

M O N I T O R I N G

Tyre deflation detection

The tyre deflation detection system isa driving aid which informs you of the

condition of your tyres.It does not replace either vigilance orresponsibility on the part of the driver.

Economy mode

After switching off the engine, somesystems (radio, wipers, electricwindows, opening roof, electric seats,telephone, video, interior lighting,motorised tailgate, etc.) are suppliedelectrically for a maximum of no morethan around one hour, so as to avoid

discharging the battery.

This period may be reducedconsiderably if the battery's state of

charge is low.

Once this period is over, a message isdisplayed on the instrument panel screenand the active functions are placed onstandby.

These functions will be automatically rea-ctivated when the vehicle is restarted.

111

185



P A S S E N G E R S A F E T Y

Front passenger's airbagdeactivation

Child safetySeat belts and frontpassenger's airbag

The seat belt fastened/unfastenedstatus for each seat category is indicatedby the lighting or flashing of the warninglamps linked to each position:

A. Non-fastened/unfastened front and/or rear seat belts warning lamp.

B. Front left-hand seat belt warninglamp.

C. Front right-hand seat belt warninglamp.

D. Rear right-hand seat belt warninglamp.

E. Central rear seat belt warninglamp.

F. Rear left-hand seat belt warninglamp.

G. Front passenger's airbagdeactivation warning lamp.

H. Front passenger's airbag activationwarning lamp.

31

In order to be able to use a rearwards-facing child seat in the front passenger's

seat position, it is imperative to deactivatethe passenger's airbag.

For that:

With the ignition switched off, insertthe key into the switch I .

Turn the key to the "OFF" position, thepassenger's airbag is deactivated.

The front passenger's airbag deactiva-tion warning lamp G lights up when theignition is switched on.

119

This deactivates the controls in the rearof the vehicle, both for the rear windows

and for opening the rear doors from theinside. The electric child safety deviceis activated by pressing on button J .

The activation of the function is indicatedby a message on the instrument panelscreen and the light on button J .

109



18

F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

Electric parking brake

Never leave a child alone in-side the vehicle with the igni-tion on, as they could releasethe parking brake.

Hill start assist

Manual operation

The MANUAL application/release of theparking brake is possible permanentlyby pulling/pushing control B .

Before leaving the ve-hicle, check that warn-ing lamp A (!) (red) onthe instrument panel

is permanently lit and that warninglamp P (red) on control B is lit.

With the engine running, ifyou leave the vehicle, manu-ally apply the parking brake.

Do not leave the vehicle whileit is being held in the tempo-rary immobilisation hill startassist phase.

To aid starting on a gradient, your vehicleis equipped with a system which keepsit immobilised for a short time (about 1second), the approximate time it takesto move your foot from the brake pedalto the accelerator pedal.

This function is only active when:- The vehicle is completely stationary,

with your foot on the brake pedal.

- In particular conditions on a slope.

- With the driver's door closed.

Before leaving the ve-hicle, check that warn-ing lamp A (!) (red) onthe instrument panel

is permanently lit and that warninglamp P (red) on control B is lit.

Automatic operation

The electronic parking brake releasesautomatically and progressively whenyou press the accelerator. With thevehicle stationary, the parking brakeis automatically applied when theengine is switched off.

D R I V I N G

123 130



This system allows you to maintain aconstant vehicle speed programmed bythe driver.

Cruise controlSpeed limiter

This system allows you to choose a maxi-mum speed that you do not wish to exceed.

The chosen speed must be higherthan 20 mph (30 km/h) . Cruise control is active on the higher

gears of the gearbox. The chosenspeed must be higher than 25 mph(40 km/h).

Instrument panel display

The speed limiter or cruise controlmode is displayed on the instrumentpanel when selected.

Cruise control

Speed limiter

Selection of "LIMIT": Activation of speed limitermode.

"SET +" : Increase of themaximum speed.

"SET -": Reduction of themaximum speed.

Suspension or resumption ofmode.

Deactivation.

The chosen speed ismemorised.

"SET": Memorisationof the speed (systempaused).

Selection of "CRUISE : Activation of cruise controlmode.

"SET +" : Increase of thememorised speed (system ON).

"SET -" : Reduction of thememorised speed (system ON).

Suspension or resumption ofmode.

Deactivation.

D R I V I N G

138 140



20

F A M

I L I A R

I S A T I O

N

Move the stalk briefly upwards ordownwards, without going beyondthe resistance point; the directionindicators will flash 3 times.

Positions

P: Parking.

R: Reverse gear.

N: Neutral.

D: Automatic mode.

M: Sequential mode.

The automatic gearbox offers you:

- Operation in auto-active mode ,with automatic adaptation to yourstyle of driving as well as to the road

profile (Position D ).- Operation in sequential mode , with

manual gear changing (Position M ).

- Operation in automatic SPORTmode (Position D) and press but-ton A .

- Operation in automatic SNOWmode (Position D) and press but-ton B .

For safety:

The gear lever can only bedisengaged from position P if you are pressing thebrake pedal.

When a door is opened, an audiblesignal sounds if the gear selector isnot in position P.

Before leaving the vehicle, makeabsolutely certain that position P is

selected.

Direction indicators -"Motorway" function

Automatic gearbox

D R I V I N G

110

131

D R I V I N G



You can activate/deactivate the parkingassistance by pressing button B . Whenthe parking assistance is inactive, thewarning lamp on button B is lit up.

Parking assistance(visual and sound)

Parking space sensor

You can select the "Parking spacesensor" by pressing button A , directionindicator activated on the side of thespace to be measured, with a speedlower than 6 mph (10 km/h) and at adistance of less than 1.5 m from thespace.

The fixed lighting of the warning lampindicates that this function is selected.

D R I V I N G

143

145

This device is recommended onmotorways and dual carriageways, andoperates only at speeds above 50 mph(80 km/h).

A press on button C activates thefunction, the warning lamp on the buttonlights up.

Lane departure warning system

The system does not alert you if one

of your direction indicators is operatingand for approx. 20 seconds after thedirection indicator has stopped.

142

I N S T R U M E N T S d C O N T R O L S



22

I N S T R U M E N T S a n d C O N T R O L S

PETROL - DIESEL MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC GEARBOX INSTRUMENT PANELS

Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lights.

A. Fuel gauge

B. Indicator:

● Coolant temperature

● Cruise control/Speed limiterinformation

C. Speed indicator

D. Rev counter

E. Indicator:

● Engine oil temperature

● Gear selector position and gearengaged (Automatic gearbox)

F. Controls:

● Lighting rheostat

● Resetting to zero of trip mileagecomputer and maintenance

indicator

G. Instrument panel screen indicating:

● Depending on the page selectedwith the left-hand control knobon the steering wheel:

- Digital speed

- Trip computer

- Navigation (guidance)information

- Display of message alerts- Engine oil level check

- Maintenance indicator

● Permanently:

- Trip mileage recorder

- Total mileage recorder





"Choice of language" menu

This allows you to choose the displayand voice recognition language.

"Choice of units" menu

This allows you to choose metric orimperial units.

The main menu allows you to pro-gramme certain vehicle and instrumentpanel functions:

Main menu

The instrument panel A is located inthe centre of the dashboard.

- With the vehicle stationary, youcan access the main menu ofthe instrument panel by quicklypressing on the left-hand rotatingcontrol B on the steering wheel.

- Whilst driving, the message"Action impossible whilstdriving" is displayed on the in-strument panel if you try to openthe main menu.

"Vehicle parameters" menu

This allows you to access the pa-rameters relating to:

- The vehicle lighting.

- The comfort levels in the vehicle.




24


"Lighting" menu

Once you have selected this menu,you can:

Activate/deactivate the lightingof the daytime-running lamps.

Activate/deactivate the guide-me-home lighting and adjust itsduration.

Activate/deactivate the dual-

function Xenon directional head-lamps.

"Comfort" menu

Once you have selected this menu,you can:

Activate/deactivate the driver'swelcome lighting function.

Select the unlocking of all thedoors or just the driver's door.

Activate/deactivate the auto-matic engaging of the electronic

parking brake.





TRIP COMPUTER

System which provides current in-formation concerning the route trav-elled (range, consumption, etc.)

Data displays

Route zero resetThe trip computer is displayed onthe instrument panel display. Turn the left-hand dial A on the

steering wheel to display the varioustrip computer tabs in succession:- the current information tab is

displayed in zone B of the in-strument panel, with:

● the range,

● the current consumption,

- the route "1" tab is displayedin zone C of the instrumentpanel, with:

● the distance travelled,

● the average consumption,

● the average speed,

for the first route.

- the route "2" tab is displayedin zone C of the instrumentpanel, with:

● the distance travelled,

● the average consumption,

● the average speed,

for the second route.

When the route required is dis-played, press the left-hand dialon the steering wheel for morethan two seconds.

The routes "1" and "2" are inde-pendent but their use is identical.Route "1" permits, for example, dailycalculations, and route "2" monthlycalculations.




26


A few definitions…

Range

(km or miles)

Current consumption

(l/100 km or km/l or mpg)

Average consumption

(l/100 km or km/l or mpg)

Distance travelled

(km or miles)

Average speed

(km/h or mph)

This indicates the distance whichcan still be travelled with the fuel re-maining in the tank in relation to theaverage consumption over the lastfew miles (kilometres) travelled.

This figure may increase followinga change in the style of driving orthe relief, resulting in a significantchange in the current consump-tion.

When the range falls below 20 miles(30 km), dashes are displayed. Afterfilling with at least 5 litres of fuel,the range is recalculated and is dis-played when it exceeds 60 miles(100 km).

If dashes are displayed continu-ously while driving in place of thedigits, contact a CITROËN dealer.

This function is only displayed from20 mph (30 km/h).

This is the average quantity of fuel con-sumed during the last few seconds.

This is the average quantity of fuelconsumed since the last trip computerzero reset.

This indicates the distance travelledsince the last trip computer zero reset.

This is the average speed calculat-ed since the last trip computer zeroreset (ignition on).





Return to the maininstrument panel screendisplay

Successive rotations of the left-handcontrol knob on the steering wheelallow you to return to the main instru-

ment panel screen display (vehiclespeed), via the navigation informa-tion screen, then the screen display-ing only the total mileage and the tripmileage (bottom of screen).

Display of navigationinformation on instrumentpanel screen

You can display navigation informa-tion on the instrument panel screenby rotating the left-hand knob on thesteering wheel.

Log of alerts

This function allows you to displaythe log of alerts.

Press on button A .

The following messages appearconsecutively on the instrumentpanel screen:

- Tyre pressure check.- Maintenance indicator reminder.- Display of message alerts.- Oil level check.





Return to the maininstrument panel screendisplay

Successive rotations of the left-handcontrol knob on the steering wheelallow you to return to the main instru-

ment panel screen display (vehiclespeed), via the navigation informa-tion screen, then the screen display-ing only the total mileage and the tripmileage (bottom of screen).

Display of navigationinformation on instrumentpanel screen

You can display navigation informa-tion on the instrument panel screenby rotating the left-hand knob on thesteering wheel.

Log of alerts

This function allows you to displaythe log of alerts.

Press on button A .

The following messages appearconsecutively on the instrumentpanel screen:

- Tyre pressure check.

- Maintenance indicator reminder.

- Display of message alerts.

- Oil level check.




28


Indicator and warning lights

When the ignition is switched on

The warning lights come on for a

few seconds when the vehicle's ig-nition is switched on.

When the engine is started, thesewarning lights should switch off.

Operation indicator lights

Visual indicators informing the driverthat a system is in operation (opera-

tion or deactivation indicator lights)or of the occurrence of a fault (warn-ing light).

1. Front fog lamps.

2. Left-hand directionindicator.

3. Side lights.

4. Main beam headlamps.

5. Dipped headlamps.

6. Right-hand directionindicator.

7. Rear fog lamps.





Deactivation warning lights

If one of the following warning lightscomes on, this confirms that thecorresponding system has beenswitched off intentionally.

Passenger's air bag systemdeactivation

Dynamic stability control(ESP/ASR) deactivation

The ESP/ASR system is putinto service automaticallywhen the vehicle is started.

A specific button, locatedin the centre of the fascia, permitsdeactivation of the system. This isconfirmed by continuous lighting ofthis warning light and of the indicator

light on the button.From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h),the system is reactivated automatically.

Warning lightsDiesel engine pre-heating

Wait until this is switched off beforeoperating the starter.

When the engine is running or thevehicle is moving, the lighting ofone of the following warning lightsindicates the occurrence of a faultrequiring intervention on the part ofthe driver.

Any fault resulting in the displayingof a warning light must be the subject of further diagnostics by reading

the associated message on the mul-tifunction display.Should you encounter any prob-lems, do not hesitate to contact aCITROËN dealer.

Front passenger's airbagactivation

If this comes on temporarily whenthe ignition is switched on, it indi-cates that the front passenger's air-

bag is active.

The passenger's air bag

system is put into serviceautomatically when the ve-hicle is started.

A specific control, located in the glovebox, permits deactivation of the sys-tem. This is confirmed by continuouslighting of this warning light on theinstrument panel or a message onthe multifunction screen.



















bag is active.







30


Lighting is associatedwith another warninglight:

Service

If this warning lightcomes on, it indicatesthe occurrence of a

problem in one of thesystems which does not have a spe-cific warning light.In order to identify it, consult the mes-sage on the multifunction display.The warning light only comes on tem-porarily in the case of the followingminor faults:- incorrect closing of the doors,

boot, rear screen and bonnet,- flat remote control battery,- insufficient tyre pressure,

- the saturation of the particleemission filter (Diesel).

In the case of major faults, the warn-ing light remains on until the operatingfault is rectified, contact a CITROËNdealer as soon as possible.

Braking

If this comes on, it indicatesthe occurrence of a fault inone of the braking systems:

- significant drop in the level in the

circuit,- electronic brake force distribution(EBFD) faulty (simultaneous light-ing of the ABS warning light),

stop the vehicle immediately and assafely as possible.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

Parking brake

When stationary, the perma-nent lighting of this warninglamp confirms that the park-ing brake is applied.

If this warning lamp flashes, it indicatesa fault with its application or release.Consult a CITROËN dealer.With the engine running, and whendisplayed at the same time as theSTOP warning lamp, it indicates thatthe brake fluid level is too low.

Electronic parking brake fault

This warning lamp comeson if there is a fault with theelectronic parking brake.

Electronic parking brake- deactivation of automaticfunctions

This warning lamp comes

on if the "automatic lock-ing" (upon switching off theignition) and the "automaticunlocking" functions are de-activated or faulty.

Dynamic stability control(ESP/ASR)


Unless the system has been deacti-vated, if this warning light comes oncontinuously, accompanied by a mes-sage on the instrument panel screen,switching on of the SERVICE warninglight and an audible signal, this indi-cates the occurrence of a fault in theESP/ASR system.

Central alert

- punctured wheel,

- braking,- coolant temperature,stop the vehicle immediately and assafely as possible.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

If this comes on, it indicatesthe occurrence of a fault in

the anti-lock braking system.

However, this does not prevent op-eration of the vehicle's assistedbraking.

If this warning lamp comes on, stopimmediately and contact a CITROËNdealer.

Consult a CITROËN dealer.





Engine autodiagnostics system

If this comes on, it indicatesthe occurrence of a fault inthe engine managementsystem.

If it flashes, it indicates the occurrence of

a fault in the emission control system.

Maximum coolant temperature

If this comes on, it indicatesthat the temperature in thecooling system is too high.Stop the vehicle immediatelyand as safely as possible.

Check the coolant level.

If the level is low, contact a CITROËNdealer.

Fuel low

If this comes on, it indicatesthat the range remainingis approximately 30 miles(50 km).

It may be less than this in certaindriving conditions and depending onthe engine.

The capacity of the tank is approxi-mately 71 litres.

Battery charge

If this comes on, it indi-cates the occurrence of afault in the battery chargingcircuit (dirty or loose termi-nals, slack or cut alternator

belt...).

Seat belt not fastened/unfastened*

* According to country.

This warning lamp lightsup on the instrument panelto remind the driver and allpassengers that they mustfasten their seat belt.

It is linked to the seat belt informa-tion given by the roof console.

Seat belt non-fastening/unfastening

This warning lampinforms you of thenon-fastening andunfastening of the

driver and passenger seat belts.The lit up positions represent thepassengers whose seat belts arenot fastened/unfastened.Driver’s seat belt not fastened:- The warning lamp lights up be-

tween 0 and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 12 mph, it flashes accompa-nied by a sound signal for around120 seconds.

Front and rear passenger seat beltsnot fastened:

- When the ignition is switched on,the points corresponding to the seatpositions with seat belts not fas-tened remain lit up for 30 seconds.

Seat belts unfastened during the journey:- The point corresponding to the

seat position with seat belt un-fastened lights up between 0 and12 mph (20 km/h). Above 12 mph,it flashes accompanied by a soundsignal for around 120 seconds.The sound signal stops when the

seat belt is re-fastened or if a dooris opened.




32


Maintenance indicator

System which informs the driverwhen the next service is due, in ac-cordance with the manufacturer'sservicing schedule.

The point at which the service is due

is calculated from the last indicatorzero reset. It is determined by twoparameters:- the distance travelled,- the time elapsed since the last

service.

More than 620 miles (1 000 km)remain before the next service is due

For 5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the spanner symbolis-ing the service operations comes on.The distance recorder display lineindicates the distance remaining be-fore the next service is due.Example: 1 900 miles remain be-fore the next service is due.For 5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the display indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the spanner isswitched off ; the distance recorderresumes its normal operation. Thedisplay then indicates the total andtrip distances.

Less than 620 miles (1 000 km)remain before the next service is due

Example: 500 miles remain beforethe next service is due.For 5 seconds after the ignition is

switched on, the display indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the distance recorderresumes its normal operation. Thespanner remains on to indicate thata service must be carried out soon.

Service overdue

For 5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must becarried out as soon as possible.Example: the service is overdue by300 miles.For 5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the display indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition isswitched on, the distance recorderresumes its normal operation. The

spanner remains lit .

The distance remaining may beweighted by the time factor, depend-

ing on the driver's driving habits.Therefore, the spanner may alsocome on if you have exceeded thetwo year service interval.





Maintenance indicator zero reset

After each service, the maintenanceindicator must be reset to zero.Your CITROËN technician resets theindicator to zero after each service.However, if you do your own serv-

icing, the procedure for resetting tozero is as follows: switch off the ignition, press and hold the trip distance

recorder zero reset button, switch on the ignition; the dis-

tance recorder display begins acountdown,

when the display indicates"=0" ,release the button; the spannerdisappears.

Following this operation, if you wish

to disconnect the battery, lock thevehicle and wait at least five minutesfor the zero reset to be taken into ac-count.

Engine oil level indicator

System which informs the driver ofthe validity or invalidity of the engineoil level.

This information is indicated for afew seconds when the ignition is

switched on, after the service infor-mation.The level read will only be correct ifthe vehicle is on level ground andthe engine has been off for morethan 15 minutes.

Oil level correct

Lack of oil

This is indicated by displaying of the

message "Oil level incorrect".If the lack of oil is confirmed by acheck using the dipstick, it is essentialthat the level is topped up to preventdamage to the engine.

Oil level gauge fault

This is indicated by displaying of themessage "Oil level measurement notvalid". Consult a CITROËN dealer.





Maintenance indicator zero reset

After each service, the maintenanceindicator must be reset to zero.Your CITROËN technician resets theindicator to zero after each service.However, if you do your own serv-icing, the procedure for resetting tozero is as follows: switch off the ignition, press and hold the trip distance

recorder zero reset button, switch on the ignition; the dis-

tance recorder display begins acountdown,

when the display indicates"=0" ,release the button; the spannerdisappears.

Following this operation, if you wish

to disconnect the battery, lock thevehicle and wait at least five minutesfor the zero reset to be taken into ac-count.

Engine oil level indicator

System which informs the driver ofthe validity or invalidity of the engineoil level.

This information is indicated for afew seconds when the ignition is

switched on, after the service infor-mation.The level read will only be correct ifthe vehicle is on level ground andthe engine has been off for morethan 15 minutes.

Oil level correct

Lack of oil

This is indicated by displaying of the

message "Oil level incorrect".If the lack of oil is confirmed by acheck using the dipstick, it is essentialthat the level is topped up to preventdamage to the engine.

Oil level gauge fault

This is indicated by displaying of themessage "Oil level measurement notvalid". Consult a CITROËN dealer.




34


Engine oil temperature gauge

Under normal operating conditions,the bars should be within section1 .

In severe operating conditions, the

bars may extend into section2 .In this event, slow down, and if neces-sary, stop the engine and check thelevels (see corresponding chapter).

Coolant temperatureindicator



bars may extend into section 2 , theengine coolant temperature warn-ing lamp A and the STOP warninglamp will light up,stop immediately .Switch off the ignition. The coolingfan may continue to operate for acertain time .

Consult a CITROËN dealer.If the SERVICE warning lamp lightsup, check the levels (see correspond-ing chapter).

On horizontal ground, the lighting ofthe fuel low warning lamp warns youthat you are using the reserve tank.

A message alert is displayed on theinstrument panel.

Fuel gauge indicator




34


Engine oil temperature gauge



bars may extend into section2 .In this event, slow down, and if neces-sary, stop the engine and check thelevels (see corresponding chapter).

Coolant temperatureindicator



bars may extend into section 2 , theengine coolant temperature warn-ing lamp A and the STOP warninglamp will light up,stop immediately .Switch off the ignition. The coolingfan may continue to operate for acertain time .

Consult a CITROËN dealer.If the SERVICE warning lamp lightsup, check the levels (see correspond-ing chapter).

On horizontal ground, the lighting ofthe fuel low warning lamp warns youthat you are using the reserve tank.

A message alert is displayed on theinstrument panel.

Fuel gauge indicator





Total distance recorder

System which measures the totaldistance travelled by the vehicleduring its life.

The total and trip distances are dis-played for thirty seconds when the

ignition is switched off, when thedriver's door is opened and whenthe vehicle is locked or unlocked.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distancetravelled during a day or other perioduntil it is reset to zero by the driver.

With the ignition on, press thebutton until zeros appear.

Lighting rheostat

System for manual adjustment of thebrightness of the instruments andcontrols in relation to the exteriorbrightness.

Operation

Press button A to decrease thebrightness of the instrumentsand controls.

Press button B to increase thebrightness of the instrumentsand controls.

Deactivation

When the lights are off, or in daymode on vehicles fitted with daytimelights, pressing the buttons does nothave any effect.











Lighting rheostat


Operation



Deactivation












Lighting rheostat


Operation



Deactivation


M U L T I F U N C T I O N D I S P L A Y S



MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN C Main Menu

Press on the button A to view the"Main Menu" of the multifunctionscreen. This menu gives you accessto the following functions:

Presentation

Radio-CD

(see "Audio" chapter)

Bluetooth ® hands-freekit

(see "Audio" chapter)

Controls

1. Time

2. Outside temperature

3. Date and display zone

When the outside temperature is be-tween +3 °C and -3 °C, the tempera-ture display flashes (ice risk).

The outside temperature displayedmay be greater than the actual tem-perature, if the vehicle is parked inbright sunlight.

It is recommended that the drivershould not manipulate the controlswhile the vehicle is in motion.

Personalisation-Configuration

This permits activation/deactivationof the:- brightness and contrast of the

multifunction screen,

- date and time,

- units of the outside temperaturedisplayed.

A. Access to the "Main Menu"

B. Cancellation of the operation orreturn to the previous display

C. Scrolling in the screen menus

Validation at the steering wheel

D. Validation on the audio equip-ment control panel




38

Adjusting the brightness andcontrast

Press on A .

Use C to select the "Brightness -video adjustment" menu. Confirmwith a press on C on the steering

wheel or D on the audio equip-ment.

Select the configuration of thescreen using C . Confirm with apress on C on the steering wheelor D on the audio equipment.

Select the brightness setting.Confirm with a press on C on thesteering wheel or D on the audioequipment.

Select the inverse or normal dis-play mode using C then validate

with a press on C on the steeringwheel or D on the audio equip-ment. To adjust the brightnessselect "+" or "-" and save yoursetting with a press on C .

Validate with "OK" on thescreen.

Adjusting the date and thetime

Press on A .

Use C to select the "Adjustingthe date and time" menu, thenconfirm your choice with a press

on C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

Select the screen configurationusing C . Confirm with a press onC on the steering wheel or D onthe audio equipment.

Select the adjustment for thedate and the time, using B .Confirm with a press on C on thesteering wheel or D on the audioequipment.

Press C to select the values you

wish to modify. Confirm yourchoice with a press on C on thesteering wheel or D on the audioequipment.

Validate with "OK" on the screen.

Choosing the units

Press on A .

Use C to select the "Choice oftemperature units" menu, thenconfirm your choice with a presson C on the steering wheel or D on the audio equipment.

Using C , select the unit then val-idate with a press on C on thesteering wheel or D on the audioequipment.

Validate with "OK" on thescreen.

Selection of the type of

information displayed (Mode)Successive presses on the end ofthe wiper stalk or on the MODE but-ton on the audio equipment permitselection of the type of informa-tion presented on the multifunctionscreen (date or radio, CD, MP3 CD,CD changer).




16/9 COLOUR DISPLAY(WITH MYWAY)

Displays on the screen

It displays the following informationautomatically and directly:

- the time,- the date,

- the altitude,

- the exterior temperature (the val-ue displayed flashes if there is arisk of ice),

- the audio functions,

- the satellite navigation systeminformation.

Controls

From the MyWay control panel, toselect one of the applications:

press the dedicated "RADIO" ,"MUSIC" , "NAV" , "TRAFFIC" ,

"SETUP" or "PHONE" button togain access to the correspond-ing menu,

turn the navigator to move theselection,

press the navigator to confirmthe selection,

or

press the "ESC" button to aban-don the current operation and re-turn to the previous display.


For further details concerningthese applications, refer to the"Audio Equipment" section or tothe specific user guide given toyou with the other owner's docu-ments.

"SETUP" menu

Press the "SETUP" button togain access to the "SETUP" menu. This allows you to selectfrom the following functions:

- "Languages",- "Date and time",

- "Display",

- "Units",

- "System parameters".

Languages

This menu allows you to select the lan-

guage used by the display: Deutsch,English, Espanol, Français, Italiano,Nederlands, Polski, Portugues,Türkçe*.




40

Display

This menu allows you to set thebrightness of the screen, the screencolour scheme and the colour of themap (day/night or auto mode).

Units

This menu allows you to select theunits: temperature (°C or °F) anddistance (km or miles).

System parameters

This menu allows you to restore thefactory configuration, display thesoftware version and activate thescrolling text.

For safety reasons, it is imperativethat configuration of the multifunc-tion displays by the driver is carriedout when stationary.

Date and time

This menu allows you to set the dateand time, the format of the date andthe format of the time.

To set the date and time:

Press the "SETUP" control.

Turn the dial to select "DATEAND TIME" .

Press the dial to confirm.

Turn the dial to select "SETDATE AND TIME" .


Turn the dial to select a field:

- C for the day,

- D for the month,

- E for the year,

- F for the time.


Turn the dial or use the alphanu-meric keypad to select the digitswhich form the date and time.

Press the dial to confirm eachfield.

Turn the dial to select "DATEFORMAT" .

Choose the format required andpress the dial to confirm.

Turn the dial to select "TIMEFORMAT" .

Choose the format required andpress the dial to confirm.

Refer to the MyWay User Guide.




16/9 HIGH DEFINITIONCOLOUR DISPLAY(WITH NAVIDRIVE 3D)

Displays on the screenIt displays the following informationautomatically and directly:

- the time,

- the date,

- the altitude,

- the exterior temperature (the val-ue displayed flashes if there is arisk of ice),

- the audio functions,

- the telephone and address bookinformation,

- the satellite navigation systeminformation.

Controls

From the NaviDrive 3D control pan-el, to select one of the applications:

press the dedicated "RADIO" ,"MEDIA" , "NAV" , "TRAFFIC" ,"ADDR BOOK" or "SETUP" button to gain access to the cor-responding menu,

turn the navigator to move theselection,

press the navigator to confirmthe selection,

or

press the "ESC" button to aban-don the current operation and re-turn to the previous display.

For further details concerningthese applications, refer to the"Audio Equipment" section or tothe specific user guide given toyou with the other owner's docu-ments.




42 * According to country.

"SETUP" menu

Press the"SETUP" button to gainaccess to the "SETUP" menu.This allows you to select fromthe following functions:

- "Languages and voice func-tions",

- "Date and time",- "Display",

- "Units",

- "System parameters".

Languages and voice functions

This menu allows you to:

- select the language used bythe display (Deutsch, English,Espanol, Français, Italiano,Nederlands, Polski, Portugues,

Türkçe*),- select the voice recognition pa-

rameters (activation/deactiva-tion, advice on use, personalvoice programming, etc.),

- set the volume of the voice syn-thesiser.

Date and time

This menu allows you to set the dateand time, the format of the date andthe format of the time (refer to the"Audio Equipment" section or to thespecific user guide given to you withthe other owner's documents).

Display

This menu allows you to set thebrightness of the screen, the screencolour scheme and the colour of themap (day/night or auto mode).

System parameters

This menu allows you to restore thefactory configuration, display thesoftware version and activate thescrolling text.

For safety reasons, it is impera-tive that configuration of the mul-tifunction displays by the driver iscarried out when stationary.

C O M F O R T



VENTILATION

A. Sunshine sensor.

B. Air diffusion grille.

The air diffusion grille located inthe centre of the dashboard pro-vides optimum distribution of the

air for the front seats.This system eliminates unpleas-ant air currents while maintain-ing an optimum temperature inthe passenger compartment.

To open the air diffusion grille,turn the dial upwards.

To close the air diffusion grille,turn the dial fully downwards.

In very hot weather, to obtainmore satisfactory central and sideventilation, it is advisable to close

the diffused air conditioning.C. Cooled glove box.

D. Rear passenger vents.

C O M F O R T



44

Air conditioning

We recommend use of the automaticregulation of the air conditioning.

It permits automatic and optimisedcontrol of all of the following func-tions: air flow, temperature in thepassenger compartment and airdistribution, by means of varioussensors (exterior temperature, sun-shine). This eliminates any need foryou to change your settings otherthan the value displayed.

Please do not block the sunshine

sensor A .If you select the automatic mode(by pressing the "AUTO" control)and leave all of the vents open, opti-mum comfort will be maintained andhumidity and condensation will beremoved regardless of the exteriorclimatic conditions.

The temperature in the passengercompartment cannot be lower thanthe exterior temperature if the airconditioning is not on.

VENTILATION, HEATINGAND AIR CONDITIONINGRECOMMENDATIONS

In order to be effective, the air con-ditioning must be used with the win-dows closed. If the vehicle has beenparked in the sun for a long periodand the interior temperature is veryhigh, ventilate the passenger com-partment with the windows open fora few minutes, then close the win-dows.

To keep the air conditioning systemin good working order it is essentialthat it is operated at least once amonth.

The air conditioning uses the en-gine power during its operation. As aresult, the fuel consumption of thevehicle increases.

In certain cases of particularly ardu-ous use (e.g. towing the maximumload on a steep gradient in high tem-

peratures), switching off the air condi-tioning permits the recovery of enginepower and therefore increases thetowing capacity.

Air inlet

Check that the exterior grille for the airinlet, at the bottom of the windscreen,is clean and free of dead leaves,snow, etc.

When washing the vehicle using a highpressure nozzle, avoid spraying at theair inlet.

Air circulation

Maximum comfort is obtained bymeans of a good distribution of air inthe passenger compartment, both inthe front and in the rear.

To obtain a uniform distribution of

air, take care not to block the ex-terior air intake grille located at thebase of the windscreen, the vents,the air outlets under the front seatsand the air extractor located behindthe flaps in the boot.

The front and rear vents are fittedwith thumbwheels to adjust the airflow and direction. We recommendthat you leave all of the vents open.

Dust filter/Odour filter(active carbon)

There is a filter for excluding odoursand dust.

This filter has to be changed in ac-cordance with the vehicle mainte-nance schedule (see: "Maintenanceand Warranty Guide").

C O M F O R T



AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (MONO ZONE)

This is the normal sys-tem operating mode.In accordance with thelevel of comfort cho-sen, pressing this con-trol, confirmed by the

switching on of indicator light A , per-mits automatic and simultaneous con-trol of all of the following functions:

- Air flow.

- Temperature in the passengercompartment.

- Air distribution.

- Air intake.

- Air conditioning.

1. Automatic operation

It is advisable to leave all of the

vents open.Simply pressing one of the con-trols, with the exception of control2 , switches the system to manualmode.

Indicator light A switches off.

2. Temperature adjustment

Turn control2 to changethe temperature:

- Clockwise to in-crease the temper-ature.

- Anticlockwise to reduce the tem-perature.

The setting required is displayed.

The value indicated on the displaycorresponds to a level of comfortand not to a temperature in degreesCelsius or Fahrenheit, depending onthe choice of configuration validatedon the display.

A setting around the value 21 usuallymakes it possible to obtain optimumcomfort. However, depending on yourrequirements, a setting between 18and 24 is usual.

On entering the vehicle, the interiortemperature may be much colder(or warmer) than is comfortable.There is no need to change the tem-perature displayed in order to obtainrapidly the level of comfort required.

The automatic regulation of the airconditioning will use its maximumperformance settings to correct thetemperature difference as quickly as

possible.

Mono zone: this is the overall regu-lation of the temperature, distribu-tion and flow of air in the passengercompartment.

The symbols and messages associat-ed with the automatic air conditioningcontrols appear on the multifunctiondisplay.

1. Automatic operation2. Temperature adjustment

3. Air distribution adjustment

4. Activation/deactivation of the airconditioning

5. Air flow adjustment

6. Front demisting - de-icing

7. Rear demisting - de-icing

8. Air recirculation - intake of exte-rior air

9. Display

C O M F O R T



46

Control via the manual controls

It is possible to adjust one or morefunctions manually, while leaving theother functions in automatic mode.

Press one of the controls, withthe exception of that which regu-lates the temperature 2 . Indicator

light A switches off.Switching to manual mode may re-sult in discomfort (temperature, hu-midity, odour, condensation) and isnot advantageous to comfort.

To return to automatic mode, pressthe "AUTO" control.

3. Air distribution adjustment

Press the controls 3 to change the distri-bution of the air flow.

4. Air conditioning

The air conditioning will only oper-ate when the engine is running. Theair blower control (air flow adjust-ment) must be active to obtain airconditioning.

Switching off the ventilation

Turn control 5 to theleft until the flow ofair stops.

Press control 4 .Indicator light B comes on.


Turn control 5 to theright to increase theair flow or to the leftto reduce it.


In certain cases, the"AUTO" mode may notbe sufficient to demist orde-ice the windows (hu-

midity, several passen-gers, ice).

Press control 6 to clear the win-dows quickly. The indicator lightcomes on.

The "OFF" symbol is displayed onthe multifunction display.

This action switches off the displayand the indicator lights.

It deactivates all of the system'sfunctions, with the exception of therear screen demisting.

The temperature-related comfort isno longer controlled (temperature,humidity, odour, condensation).

Avoid driving for too long with the air

conditioning off.

In order to be effective, the air con-ditioning must be used with the win-dows closed.

Deactivating the air conditioning mayresult in discomfort (temperature,humidity, odour, condensation).

The indicator lights corresponding tothe distribution chosen come on:

- Windscreen and front side win-dows.

- Front ventilation (central and

side vents and air diffusion grilleif open) and rear ventilation.

- Front and rear footwells.

Simultaneous displaying of the dis-tribution of air to the windscreen andside windows and of front and rearventilation is not possible.

The air flow level is indicated by theprogressive lighting of the blocks ofthe bar graph on the control paneldisplay 9 .

To prevent condensation and dete-rioration of the quality of the air inthe passenger compartment, ensurethat an adequate flow of air is main-tained.

To reactivate the air conditioning:

Press control 1 .

C O M F O R T



It controls the temperature, air flowand intake and distributes the ven-tilation to the windscreen and frontside windows.

Resuming manual control exits from"Demisting" mode. It must be can-celled to permit renewal of the air

in the passenger compartment anddemisting.

Once the inconvenience has beeneliminated, pressing control 1 re-turns the system to "AUTO" mode.

Press control 7 , withthe engine running,to demist the rearscreen and the mir-rors. The indicatorlight comes on.

Demisting is switched off automati-cally to prevent an excessive con-sumption of current and in relationto the exterior temperature.

It may be stopped by pressing con-

trol 7 again or when the engine isswitched off.


The heated rear screen operates in-dependently of the air conditioningsystem.

8. Intake of exterior air/Recirculation of interior air

This function enables you to isolatethe passenger compartment from

exterior fumes and odours.

- When starting with the enginecold, the flow will reach its op-timum level gradually to pre-vent an excessive distributionof cold air.

- When entering the vehicle af-ter it has been parked for afairly long period, if the inte-rior temperature is very diffe-rent from your comfort settingthere is no need to changethe temperature displayedin order to quickly reach thelevel of comfort required. Thesystem automatically uses itsmaximum performance to cor-rect the difference in tempera-ture as quickly as possible.

- The water resulting from the

air conditioning condensationis discharged via an open-ing provided for this purpose;therefore, a puddle of watermay form underneath the ve-hicle when stationary.

- In all seasons, if the weatheris cool, the air conditioningis useful as it removes thehumidity from the air and thecondensation. Avoid drivingfor prolonged periods with theair conditioning switched off.

However, demisting resumes whenthe engine is switched on again.

Switch off the rear screen and exte-rior mirrors demisting when you con-sider this necessary as low currentconsumption reduces fuel consump-tion.

Press control 8 se-veral times to set theair intake mode, theindicator light comeson.

It must be cancelled as soon aspossible to permit renewal of theair in the passenger compartmentand demisting.

C O M F O R T



48

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (DUAL ZONE)

Dual zone: this is the differentiated regulation of the temperature and air distri-bution on the driver's side and the front passenger side.

The driver and his front passenger can each adjust the temperature and thedistribution of the air to suit their requirements.

The symbols and messages associated with the automatic air conditioningcontrols appear on the multifunction display.

This is the normal sys-tem operating mode.In accordance with thelevel of comfort chosen,pressing this control,confirmed by the dis-

playing of indicator light A , permitsautomatic and simultaneous controlof all of the following functions:

- Air flow.

- Temperature in the passengercompartment.

- Air distribution.

- Air conditioning.

- Automatic air recirculation.

It is advisable to leave all of the

vents open. Simply pressing one ofthe controls, with the exception ofthat which regulates the tempera-ture 1a and 1b , switches the systemto manual mode. Indicator light A switches off.

1a-1b. Automatic operation

1a. Automatic operation on thedriver's side

1b. Automatic operation on thepassenger's side

2a. Temperature adjustment on thedriver's side

2b. Temperature adjustment on thepassenger's side

3a. Air distribution adjustment onthe driver's side

3b. Air distribution adjustment onthe passenger's side

4a. Driver's zone display4b. Passenger's zone display


6. Activation/deactivation of theair conditioning

7. Air recirculation – intake ofexterior air

8. Rear demisting – de-icing

9. Front demisting – de-icing

C O M F O R T



Turn control 2a to change thetemperature on the driver's sideand control 2b to change thetemperature on the passenger'sside: to the right to increase thetemperature or to the left to re-duce it.

The setting required is displayed.

The value indicated on the displaycorresponds to a level of comfortand not to a temperature in degrees

Celsius or Fahrenheit, dependingon the choice of configuration vali-dated on the display.

A setting around the value 21 usuallymakes it possible to obtain optimumcomfort. However, depending onyour requirements, a setting between18 and 24 is usual.

On entering the vehicle, the interiortemperature may be much colder(or warmer) than is comfortable.There is no need to change the

temperature displayed in order toquickly obtain the level of comfortrequired.

The automatic regulation of the airconditioning will use its maximumperformance settings to correct thetemperature difference as quicklyas possible.

2a-2b. Temperature adjustment Control via the manual controls

Press one of the controls, withthe exception of those whichregulate the temperature 2a and2b . The indicator lights A on the"AUTO" controls switch off.

It is possible to adjust one or more

functions manually while leaving theother functions in automatic mode.

Switching to manual mode may re-sult in discomfort (temperature, hu-midity, odour, condensation) and isnot advantageous to comfort.

To return to "AUTO" mode, presscontrols 1a and 1b . The indicatorlights A come on.

3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment

Press control3a to changethe distribu-tion of the airflow on the

driver's side.

Press control 3b to change thedistribution of the air flow on thepassenger's side.

The indicator lights corresponding tothe distribution chosen come on:

- Windscreen and front side win-dows.

- Front ventilation (central andside vents and air diffusion grilleif open) and rear ventilation.

- Front and rear footwells.

Simultaneous displaying of the dis-tribution of air to the windscreen andside windows and of front and rearventilation is not possible.

C O M F O R T



50


Press the control:

- to increase the airflow,

- to reduce the air

flow.

The air flow level is indicated by theprogressive lighting of the fan bladeindicator lights.

Reducing the flow to minimumswitches the air conditioningOFF.

To prevent condensation and dete-rioration of the quality of the air inthe passenger compartment, ensurethat an adequate flow of air is main-

tained.

6. Air conditioning

The air conditioning willonly operate when theengine is running. The airblower control (air flow adjustment) must be active in

order to obtain air conditioning.

Press control 6 . The indicatorlight comes on.

In order to be effective, the air con-ditioning must be used with the win-dows closed.

7. Air recirculation - intake ofexterior air

This function enables youto isolate the passengercompartment from exte-rior fumes and odours.

Intake of air in automaticanti-pollution mode

This is activated by de-fault in automatic comfortregulation mode.

The automatic mode has an air qual-ity sensor. It analyses the air andisolates the passenger compart-ment from the outside if it detectsthe presence of pollutants. In thiscase, it automatically activates therecirculation of the passenger com-

partment air.This function does not detect un-pleasant odours and therefore doesnot prevent them from entering thepassenger compartment. It is notactive when the exterior tempera-ture is below +5 °C to avoid the riskof condensation forming inside thevehicle.

Closing the air intake

Press control 7 toclose the exterior airintake.

It must be cancelled as soon as pos-sible to permit renewal of the air inthe passenger compartment and de-misting.

Intake of exterior air

Press control 7 onceto open the exterior airintake.

While retaining the other settings,this position allows the driver to iso-late himself from unpleasant exteriorodours and fumes at any time.

C O M F O R T



When starting with the enginecold, the flow will reach its opti-mum level gradually to prevent anexcessive distribution of cold air.

When entering the vehicle after ithas been parked for a fairly longperiod, if the interior temperatureis very different from your comfortsetting there is no need to changethe temperature displayed in or-der to quickly reach the level ofcomfort required. The systemautomatically uses its maximumperformance to correct the differ-ence in temperature as quickly aspossible.

The water resulting from the airconditioning condensation is dis-charged via an opening provided

for this purpose; therefore, a pud-dle of water may form underneaththe vehicle when stationary.

In all seasons, if the weather iscool, the air conditioning is use-ful as it removes the humidityfrom the air and the condensa-tion. Avoid driving for prolongedperiods with the air conditioningswitched off.


In certain cases, the"AUTO" mode may notbe sufficient to demist orde-ice the windows (hu-midity, several passen-

gers, ice).

Press control 9 to clear the win-dows quickly. The indicator lightcomes on.

This system controls the tempera-ture, air flow and intake and dis-tributes the ventilation to the wind-screen and front side windows.

Resuming manual control exits fromthe "Demisting" mode. It must becancelled as soon as possible to

permit renewal of the air in the pas-senger compartment and demisting.

Pressing one of the controls 1a and1b returns the system to the "AUTO" mode.


Switch off the rear screen and exteriormirrors demisting when you considerthis necessary as low current con-sumption reduces fuel consumption.

The heated rear screenoperates independentlyof the air conditioningsystem.

Press control 8 , with the en-gine running, to demist the rearscreen and the mirrors. The indi-cator light comes on.

Demisting is switched off automati-cally to avoid an excessive con-sumption of current and in relationto the exterior temperature.

It may be stopped by pressing con-trol 8 again or when the engine isswitched off.

In this latter case, the demisting

resumes if the engine is switched onagain within one minute.

C O M F O R T



52

PROGRAMMABLE HEATING*

With the engine off, programmableheating preheats the coolant circuitin order to optimise the engine op-erating temperature prior to starting.

The programmable heating sys-tem can be started immediately ordelayed thanks to its programmingfunction.

With the engine idle or the vehiclestationary, it is normal to hear ahigh-pitched whistling noise andto notice some smoke/emissions.

Digital programmer

The heating system’s programmer islocated on the left-hand side of thedashboard.

1. Time or remaining functioningtime.

2. Increase (time).

3. Select programme.

4. Programme number selected.

5. Immediate start-up of heating.

6. Time adjustment and readingwarning lamp.

7. Reduce (time).

8. Heating mode warning lamp.

9. Programmable heating systemwarning lamp.

● LED lit: Activated.

● LED off: Deactivated.

Setting the time

Hold button 3 down and pressbutton 2 or button 7 . Releasebutton 3 , the time is displayedand symbol 6 flashes.

Use the two adjustment but-tons 2 (to go forward) or 7 (to go

back) until the correct time is dis-played.

Holding these buttons down willmake the numbers displayed scrollmore quickly.


C O M F O R T



Adjusting the operating duration

Press button 3 and hold it down,press button 2 or 7 at the sametime. Release button 3 . The timeand symbol 6 flash.

Press again on button 3 and holdit down, press button 2 or 7 at thesame time. Release button 3 .

The programmed operating du-ration is displayed and symbol 8 flashes.

Adjust the operating durationwith button 2 or 7 .

To memorise the setting, pressbutton 3 or wait until the displaygoes off.

Immediate start-up

Press button 5 .

The screen displays the symbol 8 andthe remaining operating duration. Thiscan be adjusted. The maximum dura-tion is 30 minutes.

The warning lamp 8 lights up andremains lit for the whole duration ofthe system’s operation. The dura-

tion of the system’s operation disap-pears after 10 seconds.

Start-up of the heating system canbe programmed between 1 minuteand 24 hours in advance.

Adjusting the remaining

operating duration

When the heating mode is active,the remaining operation durationcan be modified by between 10 and30 minutes using buttons 2 or 7 .

Programming the start-up time

You can store up to three differentstart-up times, but programme onlyone delayed start-up time.

Factory settings A :

● Start time 1 : 06.00.

● Start time 2 : 16.00.

● Start time 3 : 22.00.

The factory settings are replacedonce you adjust them. The pro-

grammed times are stored until theyare reprogrammed.

Press button 3 several times untilthe programmed start-up time isdisplayed, then buttons 2 or 7 , inthe next 10 seconds until the de-sired start-up time is displayed.

Before programming the delayedstart-up of the heating, you mustensure that the clock is set to thecorrect time.

C O M F O R T



54

Press button 3 several timesuntil the programme numbercorresponding to the requiredprogramme time is displayed.The chosen pre-selected timeis activated automatically after10 seconds if no other buttons

have been pressed.To confirm that the mode is activat-ed, symbols 4 and 8 flash until theheating starts up.

When the heating starts up, thewarning lamp 9 lights up on thedashboard and the programmerscreen.

Press button 3 briefly: the displayof the start-up time goes off.

In the event of a battery failure, thefactory settings are restored.

Stopping the heating systemwhile operating

Press button 5 .

The warning lamp 8 and the screengo out.

When a programme is operating,pressing button 2 or 7 displays theheating start-up time. A secondpress on these buttons displays thetime.

When a programme is not operat-ing, pressing button 2 or 7 displays

the time.When the heating is operating, theremaining operating duration is dis-played instead of the time.

● The pre-selected start-up timecan be modified or cancelled byfollowing the instructions previ-ously given above.

● In the event of a battery discon-nection, the programmer mustbe reset (hours, minutes etc.)

● As a secondary advantage, use

of your programmable heatingsystem allows it to be used to pre-heat the passenger compartment.

Selection and activation ofthe programmed heatingstart-up time

Cancelling the currentprogramme

Reading the time

C O M F O R T



Precautions in use:

The alarm volumetric movementsensor may be disturbed by the air-flow from the programmable heatingwhile in operation.

To avoid a false alarm while using theprogrammable heating, it is recom-

mended to deactivate the volumetricprotection.

Always switch off the program-mable heating while refuelling in

order to avoid the risk of fire orexplosion.

To avoid any risk of intoxication orasphyxiation, the additional heat-ing must not be used, even forshort periods, in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or workshop notequipped with a system for theextraction of exhaust gases.

Do not park the vehicle over in-flammable materials (e.g. drygrass, dead leaves or paper) asthis could present a fire risk.

The programmable heating sys-tem is supplied by the vehicle’sfuel tank. Before use, ensure thatthe remaining fuel level is suffi-cient. If you are using the reservefuel tank, we strongly advise younot to use the programmableheating system.

C O M F O R T



56

FRONT SEATS MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS

1. Adjustments to the height andangle of the head restraint

To raise it, pull upwards.

To lower it, press on the controlA to unlock it, and simultaneously

on the head restraint itself. Theadjustment is correct when thetop edge of the head restraint isat the same height as the top ofthe head. It is also tilt adjustable.

To raise it, press control A tounlock it, then pull it upwards. Itmay be necessary to adjust thebackrest angle.

2. Adjustment of the backrestangle

Operate the control and adjust

the position of the backrest tothe front or to the rear.

3. Adjustment of the seat height

Raise or lower the control thenumber of times required to ob-tain the desired position.

4. Longitudinal adjustment ofseat

Lift the control bar and adjust tothe desired position.

5. Adjustment of lumbar support

Turn the control and adjust to thedesired position.

6. Heated seat controls

The heated seats only operatewhen the engine is running.

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all beadjusted for optimum driving comfort.

For your safety, do not drive withthe head restraints removed; theymust be in place and correctly adjusted.

C O M F O R T



FRONT SEATS

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

To adjust the electrical seats, switch on the ignition or start the engine if thevehicle has gone into economy mode.

Seat adjustments are also possible for a short period after opening one of thefront doors or switching off the ignition.

2. Adjustment of the backrestangle

Move the control forwards orbackwards to adjust the backrest

angle.3. Adjustment of the angle of the

top of the backrest

Move the control forwards orbackwards to adjust the angle ofthe top of the backrest.

1. Adjustment of the seat heightand angle, and longitudinaladjustment

Raise or lower the front of thecontrol to adjust the seat cush-ion angle.

Raise or lower the rear of thecontrol to raise or lower the seat.

Simultaneously raise or lowerthe front and rear of the controlin order to raise or lower theentire seat.

4. Adjustment of lumbar support

This function allows you to inde-pendently adjust the height andlevel of lumbar support.

Move the control:

Forwards or backwards to in-crease or reduce the lumbarsupport.

Upwards or downwards to raiseor lower the lumbar supportzone.

Heated seats control

With the engine running, the frontseats can operate separately.

Use the corresponding adjust-ment dial, placed on the outerside of each front seat, to switchon and select the level of heatingrequired:

0 : Off.

1 : Low.

2 : Medium.

3 : High.

C O M F O R T



58

This function provides the driverwith a back massage. It only oper-ates when the engine is running.

Press on button A .

The warning lamp comes on and themassage function is activated for aperiod of 1 hour. During this time,massage is performed in cycles of6 minutes (4 minutes of massage fol-lowed by 2 minutes break). In total,the system will perform 10 cycles.

After 1 hour, the function is deacti-vated. The warning lamp goes out.

Massage function The Welcome function

The welcome function assists entryand leaving the vehicle.

After switching off the ignition andopening the driver’s door, the seatmoves back automatically and thenstays in this position, ready for thenext entry to the vehicle.

When switching on the ignition, theseat moves forward to the memo-rised driving position.

When moving the seat, take carethat no person or object hinders theautomatic movement of the seat.

This function is deactivated by de-fault. You may activate or deactivatethis function using the "Main Menu"on the instrument panel screen. Todo so, select "Vehicle parameters/Comfort/Driver welcome".

Deactivation

You can deactivate the massage

function at any time by pressing onbutton A .

Head restraint height andangle adjustments on electricseats

To adjust the angle of the headrestraint, push back or pull for-ward section C of the head re-

straint until you reach the desiredposition.

To raise it, pull upwards.

To lower it, press on the controlD to unlock it, and simultaneous-ly on the head restraint itself.

To remove it, press on the controlD to unlock it, then pull it upwards.

C O M F O R T



Storing driving positions

System which takes into account thesettings of the driver's seat, exteriormirrors and air conditioning. It ena-bles you to store up to two positions

using the buttons on the side of thedriver's seat.

Storing a position

Using buttons M/1/2

Switch on the ignition.

Adjust your seat and your exte-rior mirrors.

Press button M , then press but-

ton 1 or 2 within four seconds. An audible signal is heard indi-cating that the storing has beentaken into account.

Storing a new position cancels theprevious position.

Recalling a stored position

Ignition on or engine running

Briefly press button 1 or 2 to re-call the corresponding position.

An audible signal is heard indicatingthe end of the adjustment.

When the ignition is on, after a fewconsecutive position recalls, thefunction will be deactivated until theengine is started, to prevent dis-charging of the battery.

For your safety, avoid storing adriving position while driving.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

The rear head restraints can be re-moved and have two positions;

- high, position for use,

- low, storage position.

To raise a head restraint, pull it up-wards.

To lower it, press the lug then thehead restraint.

To remove it, place it in the high po-sition, push the lug and pull it up-wards.

To refit it, engage the head restraintrods in the holes taking care to re-main in the centreline of the seatback.

Never drive with the head restraintsremoved, they must be in placeand correctly adjusted.

C O M F O R T



Storing driving positions

System which takes into account thesettings of the driver's seat, exteriormirrors and air conditioning. It ena-bles you to store up to two positionsusing the buttons on the side of thedriver's seat.

Storing a position

Using buttons M/1/2

Switch on the ignition.

Adjust your seat and your exte-rior mirrors.

Press button M , then press but-

ton 1 or 2 within four seconds. An audible signal is heard indi-cating that the storing has beentaken into account.

Storing a new position cancels theprevious position.

Recalling a stored position

Ignition on or engine running

Briefly press button 1 or 2 to re-call the corresponding position.

An audible signal is heard indicatingthe end of the adjustment.

When the ignition is on, after a fewconsecutive position recalls, thefunction will be deactivated until theengine is started, to prevent dis-charging of the battery.

For your safety, avoid storing adriving position while driving.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

The rear head restraints can be re-moved and have two positions;

- high, position for use,

- low, storage position.

To raise a head restraint, pull it up-wards.

To lower it, press the lug then thehead restraint.

To remove it, place it in the high po-sition, push the lug and pull it up-wards.

To refit it, engage the head restraintrods in the holes taking care to re-main in the centreline of the seatback.

Never drive with the head restraintsremoved, they must be in placeand correctly adjusted.

C O M F O R T



60

REAR SEATS

Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) orright-hand (1/3) section of whichcan be folded to adapt the boot load

space.

Removing the seat cushion

Move the corresponding frontseat forwards if necessary.

Raise the front of the seat cush-ion 1 .

Tilt the seat cushion 1 fullyagainst the front seat.

Remove the seat cushion 1 from

its fixings by pulling upwards.

Refitting the seat cushion

Position the seat cushion 1 verti-cally in its fixings.

Fold down the seat cushion 1 .

Press on the seat cushion to se-cure it.

Folding the seat

In order to fold a rear seat withoutany risk of damage, always startwith the seat cushion, never withthe seat back:

move the corresponding frontseat forwards if necessary,

raise the front of the seat cushion 1 ,

tilt the seat cushion 1 fully againstthe front seat,

check that the seat belt is posi-tioned correctly on the side ofthe seat back,

lower or remove the head re-straints if necessary,

pull the control 3 forwards to re-lease the seat back 2 ,

tilt the seat back 2 .

The seat cushion 1 can be removed

to increase the loading volume.

Returning the seat back to itsoriginal position

When returning the rear seat back toits original position:

put the seat back 2 in the uprightposition and secure it,

fold the seat cushion 1 , refit the head restraints or put

them back in place.

When returning the rear seat backto its original position, take care notto trap the seat belts and ensurethat their buckles are positioned cor-rectly.

The red indicator on the control 3

should no longer be visible; if it is,push the seat fully back.

C O M F O R T



MIRRORS

Exterior mirrors

Each fitted with an adjustable mirrorpermitting the lateral rearward visionnecessary for overtaking or parking.They can also be folded.

Adjustment

With the ignition on: move control A to the right or to

the left to select the correspond-ing mirror,

move control B in all four direc-

tions to adjust, return control A to the central po-

sition.

The de-icing/demisting of the exte-rior mirrors is associated with thatof the rear screen.

Folding

from outside; lock the vehicleusing the remote control or thekey.

from inside; with the ignition on,pull control A rearwards.

If the mirrors are folded using con-trol A , they will not unfold when thevehicle is unlocked. Control A mustbe pulled again.

Unfolding

from outside; unlock the vehicleusing the remote control or thekey.

from inside; with the ignition on,pull control A rearwards.

If the position is changed manually,a long press on control A re-engag-es the mirror.The folding and unfolding of the exte-rior mirrors using the remote controlcan be deactivated by a CITROËNdealer.

The objects observed are, in real-ity, closer than they appear.Take this into account in order tocorrectly judge the distance of ve-hicles approaching from behind.

Automatic tilting in reverse gear

System which provides a view of theground during parking manoeuvresin reverse gear.

Programming

With the engine running, engagereverse gear. Select and adjust the left-hand

and right-hand mirrors in suc-cession.

The adjustment is stored immediately.

Switching on

With the engine running, engagereverse gear.

Move control A to the right or tothe left to select the correspond-ing mirror.

The glass of the mirror selected tiltsdownwards, in accordance with itsprogramming.

Switching off

Exit reverse gear and wait twen-ty seconds.

or Return control A to the central

position.The mirror glass returns to its initialposition.The mirror glass also returns to itsinitial position:- if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),

- if the engine is switched off.

C O M F O R T



62

Interior mirror

Manual modelThe mirror is fitted with a night-timeanti-dazzle device.

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror so that theglass is directed correctly in the"day" position.

Day/night position

Pull the lever to change to the

"night" anti-dazzle position. Push the lever to change to the

normal "day" position.

As a safety precaution, the mirrorsmust be adjusted to reduce the"blind spot".

Electrochromatic exterior/interior mirrors

Switching on

Switch on the ignition and press

switch 1 .The indicator light 2 comes on andthe mirror operates automatically.

Switching off

Press switch 1 .

The indicator light 2 switches offand the mirror remains in its lighteststate.

In order to guarantee optimum vis-ibility during your manoeuvres, the

glass of the interior and exterior mir-rors lightens automatically when re-verse gear is engaged.

System which automatically andprogressively changes between theday and night uses.

In order to prevent dazzle, the glassof the interior and exterior mirrorsdarkens automatically in relationto the intensity of the light from therear.

It lightens when the light (light beamof following vehicles, sun...) de-creases, so guaranteeing optimumvisibility.

Adjustable mirror providing a centralrearward view.

C O M F O R T



As a safety precaution, it is impera-tive that these operations are carriedout while the vehicle is stationary.

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

The height and depth of the steer-ing wheel can be adjusted to adaptthe driving position to the size of thedriver.

Adjustment

First, adjust the driver's seat tothe most suitable position.

When stationary , pull the con-trol A to unlock the steeringwheel.

Adjust the height and depth.

Push the control to lock the

steering wheel. After locking, if you press firmly onthe steering wheel, a slight click maybe heard.

A C C E S S



64

REMOTE CONTROL KEY

System which permits central unlock-ing or locking of the vehicle using thelock or from a distance. It is also usedto locate and start the vehicle andprovide guide-me-home lighting, aswell as providing protection againsttheft.

Unlocking the vehicle

Complete unlocking using theremote control

Unfolding the key

First press button A to unfold thekey.

Press the open padlockto unlock the vehicle.

Complete unlocking using the key

Turn the key to the left in thedriver's door lock to unlock thevehicle.

Unlocking is confirmed by rapidflashing of the direction indicatorsfor approximately two seconds andlighting of the courtesy light (if thefunction is activated). According to version, the exteriormirrors unfold at the same time.

Selective unlocking using theremote control

Press the open padlockonce to unlock the driver'sdoor only.

Press the open padlock again to

unlock the other doors and theboot.

According to version, the exterior

mirrors unfold at the same time asthe first unlocking action.

The complete or selective unlockingparameter is set via the instrumentpanel display configuration menu (see"Instruments and controls" section).

Complete unlocking is activated bydefault.

Selective unlocking is not possibleusing the key.

Each unlocking is confirmed by rapidflashing of the direction indicators forapproximately two seconds and byswitching on of the courtesy light.

Electric boot opening

Press button B to openthe boot.

A C C E S S



Normal locking using the key

Turn the key to the right in thedriver's door lock to lock the ve-

hicle completely.Locking is confirmed by fixed lightingof the direction indicators for approxi-mately two seconds and by switchingoff of the courtesy light. According to version, the exteriormirrors fold at the same time.

If one of the doors, the rear screenor the boot is still open, the centrallocking does not take place.When the vehicle is locked, if it isunlocked inadvertently, it will relockautomatically after thirty secondsunless a door is opened.

When stationary with the engineoff, locking is confirmed by flashingof the interior locking control indi-cator light.The folding and unfolding of theexterior mirrors using the remotecontrol can be deactivated by aCITROËN dealer.

Deadlocking using theremote control

Press the closed pad-lock to lock the vehiclecompletely or press theclosed padlock for morethan two seconds toclose the windows andsunroof automatically in

addition to locking. Press the closed padlock again

within five seconds to deadlockthe vehicle.

Locking the vehicle

Normal locking using the remotecontrol

Press the closed pad-lock to lock the vehiclecompletely.

Press the closed padlock formore than two seconds to closethe windows and sunroof auto-matically in addition to locking.

Deadlocking using the key

Turn the key to the right in thedriver's door lock to lock the ve-hicle completely and hold it inthis position for more than twoseconds to close the windowsautomatically in addition to locking.

Turn the key to the right againwithin five seconds to deadlockthe vehicle.

Deadlocking is confirmed by fixedlighting of the direction indicators forapproximately two seconds. According to version, the exteriormirrors fold at the same time.

Deadlocking renders the exterior andinterior door controls inoperative.It also deactivates the manual centralcontrol button.When stationary with the engineoff, locking is confirmed by flashingof the indicator lamp on the interiorlocking control.If one of the doors or the boot is openor has not been closed correctly, thecentral locking will not work.Therefore, never leave anyone in-side the vehicle when it is dead-locked.

A C C E S S



66

First press button A to fold thekey.

Locating your vehicle Press the closed padlock to locate

your locked vehicle in a car park.This is indicated by switching onof the interior lighting and flashingof the direction indicators for a fewseconds.The vehicle remains locked.

Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection

Electronic engine immobiliser

The key contains an electronic chipwhich has a special code. When theignition is switched on, this codemust be recognised in order for

starting to be possible.This electronic engine immobiliserlocks the engine management sys-tem a few minutes after the ignitionis switched off and prevents startingof the engine by anyone who doesnot have the key.

In the event of a mal-function, you are in-formed by lighting ofthis warning light, an

audible signal and a message onthe multifunction display.In this case, your vehicle does notstart; contact a CITROËN dealer assoon as possible.

Folding the key

A press on button B oper-ates the guide-me-homelighting (lighting of thesidelamps, dipped beamsand number plate lamps).

A second press before the end ofthe timing cancels the guide-me-home lighting.The timed duration can be set via the"Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu"of the instrument panel screen.

A C C E S S



STOPPING

Do not flick the accelerator at themoment of switching off the ignition.This could cause serious damage tothe turbocharger(s).

IGNITION SWITCH

1. "S": Steering lockTo unlock the steering, gently movethe steering wheel while turning thekey, without forcing it.

2. "M": Drive position

Depending on the version of yourvehicle, the orange and red warninglamps should also come on for a shorttime.

3. "D": Starter

Release the key as soon the enginehas started.If the first attempt fails, switch off theignition. Wait ten seconds then operatethe starter again.

Steering lock

1. " S": After removing the key, turn thesteering wheel to lock the steering. Thekey can only be removed in positionS .2. "M": Ignition switched on, thesteering is unlocked (by turning thekey to position M , move the steeringwheel gently if necessary).3. "D": Starter position.Never turn the key to this positionwhen the engine is running.

Key in ignition buzzer

If you forget to remove the key fromthe ignition, a buzzer sounds when

the driver's door is opened.

Do not run the engine in an en-closed space or where there is in-sufficient ventilation.

It is essential always to drive withthe engine running in order to retainbraking and steering assistance.Never remove the ignition keybefore the vehicle has come to acomplete stop. Avoid attaching a heavy object tothe key which would weigh downon its shaft in the switch and couldcause a malfunction.

Vehicles equipped with aturbocharger

Never stop the engine without havingallowed it to run for a few seconds at

idle, this being the time required forthe turbocharger to return to a normalspeed.

A C C E S S



68

Malfunction

Following disconnection of the ve-hicle battery, replacement of the re-mote control battery or in the eventof a remote control malfunction, youcan no longer unlock, lock or locateyour vehicle. First of all, use the key in the lock

to unlock or lock your vehicle. Then, reinitialise the remote control.If the problem persists, contact aCITROËN dealer as soon as possible.

Reinitialisation

Switch off the ignition. Turn the key to position 2

(Ignition) . Press the closed padlock imme-

diately for a few seconds, untilthe operation requested is trig-gered.

Switch off the ignition and removethe key from the ignition switch.

The remote control is fully opera-tional again.

Battery ref.: CR0523/3 volts.This replacement battery is avail-able from CITROËN dealers.

If the battery is flat,you are informed bylighting of this warninglight, an audible signal

and a message on the multifunctiondisplay.

Unclip the casing using a coin atthe notch.

Slide the flat battery out of itslocation.

Slide the new battery into itslocation observing the originaldirection.

Clip the casing. Reinitialise the remote control.

Changing the battery

A C C E S S



Lost keys

Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehi-cle's V5 registration certificate and yourpersonal identification documents.

The CITROËN dealer will be able toretrieve the key code and the trans-

ponder code required to order areplacement key.

Remote control

The high frequency remote control isa sensitive system; do not operate itwhile it is in your pocket as there is apossibility that it may unlock the vehi-cle, without you being aware of it.Do not repeatedly press the buttonsof your remote control out of rangeand out of sight of your vehicle.You run the risk of stopping it fromworking and the remote control wouldhave to be reprogrammed.The remote control does not operatewhen the key is in the ignition, evenwhen the ignition is switched off, ex-cept for reprogramming.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked maymake access to the passenger com-partment by the emergency servicesmore difficult in an emergency.

As a safety precaution (with childrenon board), remove the key from theignition when you leave the vehicle,even for a short time.

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modifications to theelectronic engine immobiliser system,this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasinga second-hand vehicle

Have the key codes memorised by aCITROËN dealer, to ensure that thekeys in your possession are the onlyones which can start the vehicle.

Do not throw the remotecontrol batteries away, theycontain metals which areharmful to the environment.

Take them to an approved collec-tion point.

A C C E S S



66

First press button A to fold thekey.

Locating your vehicle Press the closed padlock to locate

your locked vehicle in a car park.This is indicated by switching onof the interior lighting and flashingof the direction indicators for a fewseconds.The vehicle remains locked.

Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection

Electronic engine immobiliser

The key contains an electronic chipwhich has a special code. When theignition is switched on, this codemust be recognised in order for

starting to be possible.This electronic engine immobiliserlocks the engine management sys-tem a few minutes after the ignitionis switched off and prevents startingof the engine by anyone who doesnot have the key.

In the event of a mal-function, you are in-formed by lighting ofthis warning light, an

audible signal and a message onthe multifunction display.In this case, your vehicle does notstart; contact a CITROËN dealer assoon as possible.

Folding the key

A press on button B oper-ates the guide-me-homelighting (lighting of thesidelamps, dipped beamsand number plate lamps).

A second press before the end ofthe timing cancels the guide-me-home lighting.The timed duration can be set via the"Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu"of the instrument panel screen.

A C C E S S



Lost keys

Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehi-cle's V5 registration certificate and yourpersonal identification documents.

The CITROËN dealer will be able toretrieve the key code and the trans-

ponder code required to order areplacement key.

Remote control

The high frequency remote control isa sensitive system; do not operate itwhile it is in your pocket as there is apossibility that it may unlock the vehi-cle, without you being aware of it.Do not repeatedly press the buttonsof your remote control out of rangeand out of sight of your vehicle.

You run the risk of stopping it fromworking and the remote control wouldhave to be reprogrammed.The remote control does not operatewhen the key is in the ignition, evenwhen the ignition is switched off, ex-cept for reprogramming.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked maymake access to the passenger com-partment by the emergency servicesmore difficult in an emergency.

As a safety precaution (with childrenon board), remove the key from theignition when you leave the vehicle,even for a short time.

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modifications to theelectronic engine immobiliser system,this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasinga second-hand vehicle

Have the key codes memorised by aCITROËN dealer, to ensure that thekeys in your possession are the onlyones which can start the vehicle.

Do not throw the remotecontrol batteries away, theycontain metals which areharmful to the environment.

Take them to an approved collec-tion point.

A C C E S S



STOPPING

Do not flick the accelerator at themoment of switching off the ignition.This could cause serious damage tothe turbocharger(s).

IGNITION SWITCH

1. "S": Steering lockTo unlock the steering, gently movethe steering wheel while turning thekey, without forcing it.

2. "M": Drive position

Depending on the version of yourvehicle, the orange and red warninglamps should also come on for a shorttime.

3. "D": Starter

Release the key as soon the enginehas started.

If the first attempt fails, switch off theignition. Wait ten seconds then operatethe starter again.

Steering lock

1. " S": After removing the key, turn thesteering wheel to lock the steering. Thekey can only be removed in position S .

2. "M": Ignition switched on, thesteering is unlocked (by turning thekey to position M , move the steering

wheel gently if necessary).3. "D": Starter position.

Never turn the key to this positionwhen the engine is running.

Key in ignition buzzer

If you forget to remove the key fromthe ignition, a buzzer sounds when

the driver's door is opened.

Do not run the engine in an en-closed space or where there is in-sufficient ventilation.

It is essential always to drive withthe engine running in order to retainbraking and steering assistance.

Never remove the ignition keybefore the vehicle has come to acomplete stop.

Avoid attaching a heavy object tothe key which would weigh downon its shaft in the switch and couldcause a malfunction.

Vehicles equipped with aturbocharger

Never stop the engine without havingallowed it to run for a few seconds at

idle, this being the time required forthe turbocharger to return to a normalspeed.

A C C E S S



70

System which protects and providesa deterrent against the theft of yourvehicle. It provides two types of pro-tection, exterior and interior, as wellas an anti-tamper function.

Exterior protection

The system monitors any opening ofthe vehicle.The alarm is triggered if anyone triesto enter the vehicle by forcing a door,the boot or the bonnet.

Interior protection

The system monitors any variationin the volume in the passenger com-partment.The alarm is triggered if anyonebreaks a window or moves insidethe vehicle.If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicleor a window partially open, deactivatethe interior protection.

Anti-tamper function

The system monitors any putting outof service of its components.

The alarm is triggered if anyonetries to put the wires of the siren, thecentral control or the battery out ofservice.Do not make any modifications tothe alarm system, this could causemalfunctions.

Locking the vehicle with fullalarm

Activation

Switch off the ignition and get outof the vehicle.

Lock or deadlock the vehicle usingthe locking button on the remotecontrol.

The alarm is activated; the indicatorlight on button A flashes once persecond.

Deactivation

Unlock the vehicle using theunlocking button on the remotecontrol.

The alarm is deactivated; the indicatorlight on button A switches off.

Locking the vehicle withexterior protection alarm only

Deactivation of the interiorprotection

Switch off the ignition.

Within ten seconds, press buttonA until the indicator light is lit continu-ously.

Get out of the vehicle. Lock or deadlock the vehicle using

the locking button on the remotecontrol.

The exterior protection alarm aloneremains activated; the indicator lighton button A flashes once per second.

In order to be taken into account, thisdeactivation must be carried out eachtime the ignition is switched off.

Reactivation of the interiorprotection

Unlock the vehicle using theunlocking button on the remotecontrol.

Relock the vehicle using the re-mote control.The alarm is activated again withboth types of protection; the indicatorlight on button A switches off.

A C C E S S



Triggering

This is indicated by sounding of thesiren and flashing of the directionindicators for approximately thirtyseconds. After it has been triggered, the alarmis again operational.

If the alarm is triggered ten times insuccession, the eleventh time willresult in it becoming inactive.

If the indicator light on button A flashes rapidly, this indicates thatthe alarm was triggered duringyour absence. When the ignition isswitched on, this flashing stops im-mediately.To avoid triggering the alarm whenwashing your vehicle, lock it usingthe key.Do not activate the alarm beforedisconnecting the battery, otherwisethe siren will sound.

Failure of the remote control

Unlock the vehicle using the keyin the driver's door lock.

Open the door; the alarm is trig-gered.

Switch on the ignition; the alarmstops.

Locking the vehicle withoutalarm

Lock or deadlock the vehicle usingthe key in the driver's door lock.


Malfunction

When the ignition is switched on,lighting of the indicator light on buttonA for ten seconds indicates a sirenfault.Have it checked by a CITROËNdealer.

Automatic operation*

Depending on the legislation in forcein your country, one of these casesmay occur:- 45 seconds after the vehicle is

locked using the remote control,the alarm is activated, regardless

of the status of the doors andboot.- 2 minutes after the last door or

the boot is closed, the alarm isactivated. To avoid triggering the alarm

on entering the vehicle, firstpress the unlocking button onthe remote control.

A C C E S S



72

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

System used to open or close a win-dow manually or automatically. Fittedwith a safety auto-reverse systemand a system for deactivation in theevent of misuse of the rear controls.

1. Driver's electricwindow control.

2. Passenger's electricwindow control.

3. Rear right electricwindow control.

4. Rear left electricwindow control.

5. Deactivation of the rearelectric window and door

controls.

One-touch electric windows

There are two options:- manual mode Press or pull the control gently.

The window stops when thecontrol is released.

- automatic mode Press or pull the control firmly.

The window opens or closesfully when the control isreleased.

Pressing the control againstops the movement of the

window.

The electric window controls re-main operational for approximately45 seconds after the ignition isswitched off or until the vehicle islocked after a door is opened.If one of the passenger windowscannot be operated from the driver'sdoor control pad, carry out the operation

from the control pad of the passengerdoor concerned, and vice versa.

Safety auto-reverse

When the window rises and meetsan obstacle, it stops and partiallylowers again.

If the window cannot be closed (for

example, in the presence of ice),immediately after the movement isreversed: press and hold the control until

the window opens fully, then pull the control immediately

and hold it until the window closes, continue to hold the control for

approximately one second afterthe window has closed.

The safety auto-reverse functionis not operational during these

operations.

A C C E S S



Reinitialisation

If a window does not rise automatically,its operation must be reinitialised: pull the control until the window

stops, release the control and pull it

again until the window closes

fully, continue to hold the control for

approximately one second afterthe window has closed,

press the control to lower thewindow automatically to the lowposition,

when the window has reached thelow position, press the control againfor approximately one second.

The safety auto-reverse functionis not operational during these

operations.

Deactivation of the rearelectric window and doorcontrols

For the safety of your children,press control 5 to deactivate therear electric window controlsregardless of their position.

Indicator light on, the rear controlsare deactivated.Indicator light off, the rear controlsare activated.

Always remove the key from theignition when leaving the vehicle,

even for a short time.If an obstacle is encountered duringoperation of the electric windows,you must reverse the movement ofthe window. To do this, press thecontrol concerned.When the driver operates the con-trols for the passengers' electricwindows, he must ensure that noone is preventing correct closing ofthe windows.The driver must ensure that

the passengers use the electricwindows correctly.Be aware of children when operatingthe windows.

A message on the instrument paneldisplay informs you of the activation/deactivation of the control.

This control also deactivates theinterior controls for the rear doors(refer to the section "Child safety - §Electric child lock"). Any other status of the indicator lightindicates a malfunction of the electricchild lock. Have it checked by aCITROËN dealer.

A C C E S S



74

DOORS

Opening

From outside

When the selective unlocking is acti-vated, the first press of the remotecontrol unlocking button permitsunlocking of the driver's door only.

Pull the front door control toopen the door; this unlocks thisvehicle completely.

Pull the rear door control to openthe door; this unlocks the doorconcerned only.

With the selective unlocking acti-vated:

- the driver's door control unlocksthe driver's door only.

- the other door controls unlock

the other doors and the boot.The interior door controls do notoperate when the vehicle is dead-locked.

Manual centralised control

System which provides full manuallocking or unlocking of the doorsand boot from the inside.

Locking

Press button A to lock the vehicle.

The red indicator light on the buttoncomes on. It flashes when the doorsare locked while stationary with theengine off.

If one of the doors is open, the centrallocking from the inside does not takeplace.

After unlocking the vehicle com-pletely using the remote controlor the key, pull the door handle.

From inside

A C C E S S



Unlocking

Press button A again to unlockthe vehicle.

The red indicator light on the buttonswitches off.

If the vehicle is locked or dead-

locked from the outside, the redindicator light flashes and button A is inactive.

In this case, use the remotecontrol or the key to unlock thevehicle.

Automatic centralised control

System which provides full automaticlocking or unlocking of the doors andthe boot while driving.

You can activate or deactivate thisfunction.

Locking

When the speed exceeds 6 mph(10 km/h), the doors and the bootlock automatically.

If one of the doors is open, the auto-matic central locking does not takeplace.

If the boot is open, the automaticcentral locking of the doors is active.

Unlocking

Above 6 mph (10 km/h), pressbutton A to unlock the doors andthe boot temporarily.

Activation

Press button A for more thantwo seconds.

A confirmation message appearson the instrument panel display,accompanied by an audible signal.

Deactivation

Press button A again for morethan two seconds.

A confirmation message appearson the instrument panel display,accompanied by an audible signal.

Emergency control

System which locks or unlocks thedoors mechanically in the event ofa malfunction of the battery or of thecentral locking.

Locking the driver's door

Insert the key in the lock, thenturn it to the right.

Unlocking the driver's door

Insert the key in the lock, thenturn it to the left.

Locking the front and rearpassenger doors

Insert the key in the lock, locatedon the edge of the door, then turnit one eighth of a turn .

Unlocking the front and rearpassenger doors

Pull the interior door openingcontrol.

A C C E S S



76

BOOT (SALOON)

Press upwards on lever 1 and liftup the boot.

With the vehicle stationary, this iscarried out using:

- The remote control.

- The key in a door lock.

- The interior central locking/

unlocking control.

The boot automatically locks whenthe vehicle is moving at a speed ofover 6 mph (10 km/h), even if auto-matic central locking is deactivated.It is unlocked when a door is openedor when the central locking button ispressed (speed lower than 6 mph(10 km/h)).

Opening

Locking/unlocking Tailgate release

System for mechanical unlocking ofthe boot in the event of a battery orcentral locking malfunction.

Unlocking

Fold back the rear seats to gainaccess to the lock from insidethe boot.

Insert a small screwdriver intohole A of the lock to unlock thetailgate.

Push the white part, located in-side the lock, to the left to unlockthe boot.

A C C E S S



Electric opening

BOOT (TOURER)

Manual opening

Press upwards on lever A and liftup the tailgate.

Press upwards on lever A , orpress button B of the remotecontrol.

Do not attempt to help the opening ofthe tailgate manually after pressingthe control A .

Manual closing

Lower the tailgate using the interiorhandle C .

Electric closing

Press the push-button D to closethe tailgate.

Do not interrupt the closing of the

boot; if any obstacle prevents itclosing, the operation will stop andthe tailgate will automatically riseby a few centimetres.

Locking/unlocking

With the vehicle stationary, this iscarried out using:

- The remote control.

- The key in a door lock.

- The interior central locking/unlocking control.

Interrupting the opening/closing of the boot

When the tailgate is being openedor closed electrically, you can inter-rupt its movement at any point bypressing push-button D , the controlA or button B .

You can then open or close the tail-gate electrically or manually, if neces-sary moving it in the opposite direction

to release it.

The boot automatically locks whenthe vehicle is moving at a speed ofover 6 mph (10 km/h), even if auto-matic central locking is deactivated.It is unlocked when a door is openedor when the central locking buttonis pressed (at a speed of less than6 mph (10 km/h)).

Memorisation of anintermediate position

You can store an opening angle forthe tailgate:

Manually or automatically move thetailgate to the required position.

Make a long press on push-button D . The system emits ashort audible beep.

Release the push-button D .

A C C E S S



78

Cancelling the memorisation

With the tailgate in the intermediateposition, you can cancel the storedposition:

Make a long press on push-button D . The system emits along audible beep.

Release the push-button D . Thetailgate will return to the fullyopen position at the next use.

Electrical protection of themotor

If the tailgate is repeatedly openedand closed in quick succession, themotor can start to overheat and thencut out, preventing opening andclosing of the tailgate.

Allow the motor to cool down for tenminutes without opening or closingthe tailgate.

Closing in manual back-up moderemains possible.

To avoid risk of injury, make surethat no one is in the vicinity of theboot while opening and closing.

If the tailgate is carrying extraweight (snow, bicycle carrier, etc.)there is a risk of it closing underthis load. Support the tailgate or

first unload the bicycle carrier orclear the snow.

When using an automatic car wash,don’t forget to lock the vehicle soas to avoid any risk of motorisedopening of the tailgate.

A C C E S S



80

GLASS PANORAMIC ROOF(TOURER)

This device comprises a tinted glasspanoramic surface 1 to improvebrightness and vision in the passenger

compartment.It is fitted with an electrical blind 2 to help maintain a comfortable tem-perature and reduce noise.

Opening

Press control A .

Pressing to the 1st notch allows youto open the blind step by step.

Pressing to the 2nd notch allowsyou to fully open the blind.

The blind stops in the closest pre-defined position (11 positions) assoon as you release the control.

Closing

Press control B .

Press to the first notch to close theblind step by step.

Press to the second notch to closethe blind completely.

The blind stops at the nearest pre-set position (11 positions) as soon asyou release the control.

After a battery disconnection, or ifthere has been a malfunction, youhave to re-initialise the anti-pinchfunction:

press control B to the 2nd notch(fully closed),

wait until the blind is fullyclosed,

press controlB for at least 3 seconds.

If the blind opens randomly during aclosing operation, and straight afterthe blind stops:

Press control B until the blindcloses fully.

During these operations, the anti-pinch function does not operate.

In the event of anything beingcaught when the blind is moving,you must reverse the movement ofthe blind. To do so, reverse the po-sition of the control.

When the driver is operating theblind, he or she must always makesure that the passengers are notpreventing it from closing properly.

The driver must ensure that his pas-sengers are using the blind correctly.

Pay special attention to childrenwhen operating the blind.

Anti-pinch

If the blind meets an obstacle whilstclosing, it stops and opens partiallyagain.

You must re-initialise the anti-pinchfunction within 5 seconds of theblind stopping:

press control B until the blind isfully closed (closing in steps of afew centimetres).

SEQUENTIAL ELECTRICAL

A C C E S S



80

GLASS PANORAMIC ROOF(TOURER)

This device comprises a tinted glasspanoramic surface 1 to improvebrightness and vision in the passenger compartment.

It is fitted with an electrical blind 2 to help maintain a comfortable tem-perature and reduce noise.

Opening

Press control A .

Pressing to the 1st notch allows youto open the blind step by step.

Pressing to the 2nd notch allowsyou to fully open the blind.

The blind stops in the closest pre-defined position (11 positions) assoon as you release the control.

Closing

Press control B .

Press to the first notch to close theblind step by step.

Press to the second notch to closethe blind completely.

The blind stops at the nearest pre-set position (11 positions) as soon asyou release the control.

After a battery disconnection, or ifthere has been a malfunction, youhave to re-initialise the anti-pinchfunction:

press control B to the 2nd notch(fully closed),

wait until the blind is fullyclosed,

press controlB for at least 3 seconds.

If the blind opens randomly during aclosing operation, and straight afterthe blind stops:

Press control B until the blindcloses fully.

During these operations, the anti-pinch function does not operate.

In the event of anything beingcaught when the blind is moving,you must reverse the movement ofthe blind. To do so, reverse the po-sition of the control.

When the driver is operating theblind, he or she must always makesure that the passengers are notpreventing it from closing properly.

The driver must ensure that his pas-sengers are using the blind correctly.

Pay special attention to childrenwhen operating the blind.

Anti-pinch

If the blind meets an obstacle whilstclosing, it stops and opens partiallyagain.

You must re-initialise the anti-pinchfunction within 5 seconds of theblind stopping:

press control B until the blind isfully closed (closing in steps of afew centimetres).

SEQUENTIAL ELECTRICAL

A C C E S S



Capacity of the tank: approxi-mately 71 litres.

Low fuel level

When the minimum levelin the tank is reached,this warning light comeson on the instrument

panel, accompanied by an audiblewarning and a message on the multi-function display.

You have enough fuel left to driveapproximately 30 miles ( approx.50 km ).

Press at the top left corner, thenpull open from the left.

turn the key a quarter turn to lockand unlock the filler cap,

when refuelling, place the cap onhook A ,

fill the tank, but do not persistafter the third cut-off ; this couldcause your vehicle to malfunction.

While you are refuelling, the enginemust be stopped and the ignitionswitched off.

For a petrol engine with a cata-lytic converter, unleaded fuel iscompulsory.

Opening the fuel flap

The filler neck is narrower to en-sure that only unleaded petrol canbe put in.

Refuelling

A C C E S S



82

Fuel quality

A label inside the filler flap tells youwhich type of fuel to use.

The petrol engines are designed torun on RON 95.

However, for better performance(petrol engine), we recommendRON 98.

In winter conditions, starting fromcold may sometimes seem difficult.During periods of very cold weatherwe recommend the use of 95 or 98unleaded petrol in preference to E85so as to ensure optimum startingperformance.

BioFlex engine

A Bioflex vehicle is one that hasbeen designed to operate equallyon unleaded petrol (95 or 98 RON)or on bioethanol (in Europe this is amixture of 85 % ethanol and 15 %unleaded petrol, known as E85).

As a result, no matter how much fuelremains in the tank, and whatever thisfuel may be (unleaded petrol, E85 ora mixture of the two) you can refuel atany time with unleaded petrol (95 or98 RON) or with bioethanol (E85).

There is no problem in running thisvehicle on only unleaded petrol.

If you should put in fuel that isnot suitable for your vehicle'sengine type, it is imperative tohave the tank drained beforeyou start the engine again.

V I S I B I L I T Y



LIGHTING CONTROLS

System for selection and control ofthe various front and rear lights pro-viding the vehicle's lighting.

Main lightingThe various front and rear lights ofthe vehicle are designed to adaptthe driver's visibility progressively inrelation to the climatic conditions:

- side lights, to be seen,

- dipped headlamps to see withoutdazzling other drivers,

- main beam headlamps to seeclearly when the road is clear,

- directional headlamps for im-

proved visibility when cornering.

Additional lighting

Other lights are installed to fulfil therequirements of particular drivingconditions:

- a rear fog lamp to be seen from adistance,

- front fog lamps for even better

visibility,- daytime lights to be seen during

the day.

Programming

Various automatic lighting controlmodes are also available accordingto the following options:

- guide-me-home lighting,

- automatic lighting,

- directional lighting.

Manual controls

lights off,

automatic switching on ofthe lights,

side lights only,

dipped headlamps ormain beam headlamps.

B. lever for inversion of the lights by

pulling: dipped headlamps/mainbeam headlamps.

In the lights off and side lightsmodes, the driver can switch onthe main beam headlamps directly("headlamp flash") for as long as hepulls the lever.

Displays

Lighting of the corresponding indi-cator light on the instrument panel

confirms the selective switching onof the lighting selected.

The lighting commands are issueddirectly by the driver by means ofthe ring A and the lever B .

A. main lighting mode selectionring, with:

V I S I B I L I T Y



84

C. fog lamps selection ring.

The fog lamps operate with the sidelights and the dipped and main beamheadlamps.

- 1st turn forwards: lighting of rearfoglamps.

- 1st turn rearwards: extinction ofrear foglamps.

- 1st turn forwards: lighting of frontfoglamps.

- 2nd turn forwards: lighting of rearfoglamps.

- 1st turn rearwards: extinction ofrear foglamps.

- 2nd turn rearwards: extinction offront foglamps.

Model with rear foglampsonly

Model with front and rearfoglamps

In good or rainy weather, both dayand night, the front fog lamps andthe rear fog lamps are prohibited.In these situations, the power oftheir beams may dazzle other driv-ers. They should only be used infog or snow.

In these weather conditions, it isyour responsibility to switch on thefog lamps and dipped headlampsmanually as the brightness sensormay detect sufficient light.

Do not forget to switch off the frontfog lamps and the rear fog lampswhen they are no longer neces-sary.

Lights on buzzer

The triggering of an audible signalwhen a front door is opened warnsthe driver that he has forgotten toswitch off his vehicle's lights, withthe ignition off and in manual lightsmode.

In this case, switching off the lightsstops the audible signal.

With the ignition off, if the dippedheadlamps remain on, they willswitch off automatically after thirtyminutes to prevent discharging ofthe battery.

V I S I B I L I T Y




Daytime-running lamps

System which switches on speciallights at the front, to make the vehi-cle more visible by day.

They light up automatically and per-manently, when the engine is run-ning, if:

- The function is activated* in the"Main Menu" of the instrumentpanel screen.

- The lighting control is at position 0 or AUTO .

- All the headlamps are off.

You can deactivate* this functionusing the "Main Menu" of the instru-ment panel screen.

Manual guide-me-homelighting

The temporary maintaining of thedipped headlamps lighting after thevehicle's ignition has been switchedoff makes the driver's exit easierwhen the light is poor.

Switching on

With the ignition off, "flash" theheadlamps using the lever B .

A second "headlamp flash"switches the function off again.

Switching off

The manual guide-me-home lighting

switches off automatically after a settime.

Automatic lighting

The side lights and dipped head-lamps are switched on automatically,without any action on the part of thedriver, when a low level of externallight is detected or in certain cases ofactivation of the windscreen wipers.

As soon as the brightness returnsto a sufficient level or after the wind-screen wipers are switched off, thelights are switched off automatically.

Activation

Turn ring A to the "AUTO" po-sition. The automatic lighting isaccompanied by a message onthe multifunction display.

Deactivation

Turn ring A to a position otherthan "AUTO" . Deactivation isaccompanied by a message onthe multifunction display.

V I S I B I L I T Y



86

Linked with the automatic"Guide-me-home" lighting

Link with the automatic lighting pro-vides the "guide-me-home" lightingwith the following additional options:- selection of the duration of main-

taining of the lighting for 15, 30 or60 seconds in the vehicle para-meters on the multifunction displayconfiguration menu,

- automatic activation of "guide-me-home" lighting when automaticlighting is in operation.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction of thebrightness sensor, the lights comeon and a message appears on themultifunction display, accompaniedby an audible signal.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

In fog or snow, the brightnesssensor may detect sufficient light.Therefore, the lights will not comeon automatically.Do not cover the brightness sensor,linked with the rain sensor andlocated in the centre of the wind-screen behind the interior mirror;the associated functions would nolonger be controlled.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OFTHE HEADLAMPS

To avoid dazzling other road users,the height of the halogen bulb head-lamps must be adjusted accordingto the load in the vehicle.0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.-. 3 people.1. 5 people.-. Intermediate setting.2. 5 people + maximum authorised

loads.-. Intermediate setting.3. Driver + maximum authorised

loads.Initial setting is position "0".

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENTOF THE DIRECTIONALHEADLAMPS

Do not touch the xenon headlamps.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

If a malfunction oc-curs, this warninglight is displayed onthe instrument panel,accompanied by anaudible signal and amessage on the multi-function display.

The system then places your head-lamps in the lowest position.

In order to avoid causing a nuisanceto other road users, this system cor-rects the height of the xenon head-lamps beam automatically and whenstationary, in relation to the load inthe vehicle.

V I S I B I L I T Y



86

Linked with the automatic"Guide-me-home" lighting

Link with the automatic lighting pro-vides the "guide-me-home" lightingwith the following additional options:- selection of the duration of main-

taining of the lighting for 15, 30 or60 seconds in the vehicle para-meters on the multifunction displayconfiguration menu,

- automatic activation of "guide-me-home" lighting when automaticlighting is in operation.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction of thebrightness sensor, the lights comeon and a message appears on themultifunction display, accompaniedby an audible signal.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

In fog or snow, the brightnesssensor may detect sufficient light.Therefore, the lights will not comeon automatically.Do not cover the brightness sensor,linked with the rain sensor andlocated in the centre of the wind-screen behind the interior mirror;the associated functions would nolonger be controlled.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OFTHE HEADLAMPS

To avoid dazzling other road users,the height of the halogen bulb head-lamps must be adjusted accordingto the load in the vehicle.0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.-. 3 people.1. 5 people.-. Intermediate setting.2. 5 people + maximum authorised

loads.-. Intermediate setting.3. Driver + maximum authorised

loads.Initial setting is position "0".

AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENTOF THE DIRECTIONALHEADLAMPS

Do not touch the xenon headlamps.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

If a malfunction oc-curs, this warninglight is displayed onthe instrument panel,accompanied by anaudible signal and amessage on the multi-function display.

The system then places your head-lamps in the lowest position.

In order to avoid causing a nuisanceto other road users, this system cor-rects the height of the xenon head-

lamps beam automatically and whenstationary, in relation to the load inthe vehicle.

V I S I B I L I T Y

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING D ti ti



DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING

without bend lighting

with bend lighting

"Bend lighting" function

With dipped or main beams, thisfunction provides additional lightingfor the inside of a bend, when the

vehicle speed is below 25 mph (ap-prox 40 km/h).

This lighting is most useful whentravelling at low and medium speed(urban driving, winding road, inter-sections, parking manoeuvres...).

Activation

This function is activated:

- when the direction indicator isactivated,

- from a certain angle of rotation ofthe steering wheel.

Deactivation

This function is deactivated:- below a certain angle of rotation

of the steering wheel,- when stationary or at very low

speed,- when reverse gear is engaged,

- when the directional headlampsare switched off.

V I S I B I L I T Y

P iDi ti l h dl



88

Programming

The function is activated or deactivat-ed via the instrument panel display"Main Menu".To do this, select "Vehicle parame-ters\Lighting\Directional headlamps".

Operating fault

If a malfunction occurs, thiswarning light flashes on theinstrument panel, accompa-nied by a message on the

multifunction display.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

When stationary or moving at verylow speed or when reverse gear isengaged, the function is inactive.The status of the function remainsin the memory when the ignition isswitched off.

Directional headlampsfunction

When the dipped or main beamheadlamps are on, this function,associated with the "bend lighting"function, enables the light beam tofollow the direction of the road.

The use of this function, linked withthe xenon headlamps only, consid-erably improves the quality of yourlighting when cornering.

without directional lighting

with directional lighting

V I S I B I L I T Y

WIPER CONTROLS M l t l R i (T )



WIPER CONTROLS

System for selection and control ofthe various front and rear wipingmodes for the elimination of rain andcleaning.The vehicle's various front and rearwipers are designed to improve the

driver's visibility progressively inrelation to the climatic conditions.

Programming

Various automatic wiper controlmodes are also available accordingto the following options:- automatic wiping for the wind-

screen wipers,- rear wiping on engaging reverse

gear.

Manual controls

The wiper commands are issueddirectly by the driver by means ofthe lever A and the ring B .

Rear wiper (Tourer)

B. rear wiper selection ring:

park,

intermittent wipe,

wash-wipe (set duration).

fast (heavy rain),

normal (moderate rain),

intermittent (proportional tothe speed of the vehicle),

automatic, then singlewipe (see followingpage).

park,

single wipe (press downwards),

Windscreen wipers

A. wiping speed selection lever:

or

If a significant accumulation of

snow or ice is present, or whenusing a tailgate bicycle carrier, de-activate the automatic rear wipervia the instrument panel displayconfiguration menu.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Reverse gear A tomatic indscreen iping Switching off



90

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, therear wiper will come into operation ifthe windscreen wipers are operating.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivat-ed via the instrument panel displayconfiguration menu.

This function is activated by default.

Windscreen and headlampwash

Pull the windscreen wiper stalktowards you. The windscreenwash then the windscreen wipersoperate for a fixed period.

If the dipped headlamps are on ,the headlamp washers operate atthe same time.

Automatic windscreen wiping

The windscreen wipers operate auto-matically, without any action on thepart of the driver, if rain is detected(sensor behind the interior mirror),adapting their speed to the intensityof the rainfall.

Activation

This is controlled manually by thedriver by pushing lever A to the"AUTO" position.It is accompanied by a message onthe instrument panel display.

Switching off

This is controlled manually by thedriver by moving lever A upwardsand returning it to position"0" .It is accompanied by a message onthe instrument panel display.The automatic wiping must be reac-

tivated if the ignition has been off formore than one minute, by pushinglever A downwards.

Operating fault

If an automatic wiping malfunctionoccurs, the wipers will operate in in-termittent mode.Have it checked by a CITROËN

dealer.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linkedwith the brightness sensor andlocated in the centre of the wind-screen behind the interior mirror.Switch off the automatic wipingwhen using an automatic car wash.

In winter, it is advisable to wait untilthe windscreen is completely clearof ice before activating the auto-matic wiping.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Reverse gear Automatic windscreen wiping Switching off



90

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, therear wiper will come into operation ifthe windscreen wipers are operating.

Programming

The function is activated or deactivat-ed via the instrument panel displayconfiguration menu.

This function is activated by default.

Windscreen and headlampwash

Pull the windscreen wiper stalktowards you. The windscreenwash then the windscreen wipersoperate for a fixed period.

If the dipped headlamps are on ,the headlamp washers operate atthe same time.

Automatic windscreen wiping

The windscreen wipers operate auto-matically, without any action on thepart of the driver, if rain is detected(sensor behind the interior mirror),adapting their speed to the intensityof the rainfall.

Activation

This is controlled manually by thedriver by pushing lever A to the"AUTO" position.It is accompanied by a message onthe instrument panel display.

Switching off

This is controlled manually by thedriver by moving lever A upwardsand returning it to position"0" .It is accompanied by a message onthe instrument panel display.The automatic wiping must be reac-

tivated if the ignition has been off formore than one minute, by pushinglever A downwards.

Operating fault

If an automatic wiping malfunctionoccurs, the wipers will operate in in-termittent mode.Have it checked by a CITROËN

dealer.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linkedwith the brightness sensor andlocated in the centre of the wind-screen behind the interior mirror.Switch off the automatic wipingwhen using an automatic car wash.

In winter, it is advisable to wait untilthe windscreen is completely clearof ice before activating the auto-matic wiping.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Special position of the COURTESY LIGHTS In this position the courtesy



Special position of thewindscreen wipers

In the minute following switching offof the ignition, any action on the stalkpositions the wipers in the centre ofthe windscreen.This action enables you to position

the wiper blades for winter parking,cleaning or replacement.To park the wipers after this hasbeen done, switch on the ignitionand operate the stalk.

For optimum and lasting wiping ofthe "flat-blade" wiper blades, it isadvisable to:- handle them with care,- clean them regularly using

soapy water,- change them approximately

every 6 months,- avoid using them to retain card-

board on the windscreen.

COURTESY LIGHTS

Selection and control of the variouspassenger compartment lights.

1. Front courtesy light 2. Map reading lights

Front courtesy light

Rear courtesy light

1. Rear courtesy light 2. Map reading lights

In this position, the courtesylight comes on gradually:

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

- when the vehicle is unlocked,- when a door is opened,- when the key is removed from

the ignition,- when the remote control locking

button is activated, in order to lo-cate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually:- when the vehicle is locked,- when the ignition is switched on,- 30 seconds after the last door is

closed.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Special position of the COURTESY LIGHTS In this position the courtesy



Special position of thewindscreen wipers

In the minute following switching offof the ignition, any action on the stalkpositions the wipers in the centre ofthe windscreen.

This action enables you to position

the wiper blades for winter parking,cleaning or replacement.

To park the wipers after this hasbeen done, switch on the ignitionand operate the stalk.

For optimum and lasting wiping ofthe "flat-blade" wiper blades, it isadvisable to:

- handle them with care,

- clean them regularly using

soapy water,- change them approximately

every 6 months,

- avoid using them to retain card-board on the windscreen.

COURTESY LIGHTS

Selection and control of the variouspassenger compartment lights.

1. Front courtesy light

2. Map reading lights

Front courtesy light

Rear courtesy light

1. Rear courtesy light

2. Map reading lights

In this position, the courtesylight comes on gradually:

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

- when the vehicle is unlocked,

- when a door is opened,

- when the key is removed fromthe ignition,

- when the remote control lockingbutton is activated, in order to lo-cate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually:

- when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on,

- 30 seconds after the last door isclosed.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Panoramic glass roof rear



92

In permanent lighting mode, differentlighting times are available:

- with the ignition off, approxi-mately ten minutes,

- in energy economy mode, approxi-mately thirty seconds,

- with the engine running, unlimited.

Map reading lights

With the ignition on, press thecorresponding switch.

Panoramic glass roof rearreading lights (Tourer)

With the key in position or with theignition on:

Press the corresponding switch.

The reading light concerned comeson for ten minutes.

The rear reading lights come on:

- when the key is removed fromthe ignition,

- when the vehicle is unlocked.

They switch off gradually:

- when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on.

V I S I B I L I T Y

AMBIENT LIGHTING DOOR LIGHTING



AMBIENT LIGHTING

Your vehicle is equipped with warmand welcoming ambient lighting.

A soft orange light is emitted.

Operation

When starting the engine, with thevehicle lights on, lights located alongthe dashboard are activated.

Central console

The lights are located on the roofconsole, near the front interior lamp.They light up the central console.

DOOR LIGHTING

Door opening controlslighting

Dashboard

Operation

These lights are activated with theautomatic switching on of the lights,when the exterior light is poor. They

are deactivated when the instrumentpanel goes out.

The intensity of the lighting variesalong with that of the instrumentpanel.

Press buttons A to increase or reduce the intensity of the lighting.

They are located on the front andrear interior door opening controls.

The rear door opening controls light-ing is deactivated if child safety isactivated.

V I S I B I L I T Y

AMBIENT LIGHTING DOOR LIGHTING



AMBIENT LIGHTING

Your vehicle is equipped with warmand welcoming ambient lighting.

A soft orange light is emitted.

Operation

When starting the engine, with thevehicle lights on, lights located alongthe dashboard are activated.

Central console

The lights are located on the roofconsole, near the front interior lamp.They light up the central console.

DOOR LIGHTING

Door opening controlslighting

Dashboard

Operation

These lights are activated with theautomatic switching on of the lights,when the exterior light is poor. They

are deactivated when the instrumentpanel goes out.

The intensity of the lighting variesalong with that of the instrumentpanel.

Press buttons A to increase or reduce the intensity of the lighting.

They are located on the front andrear interior door opening controls.

The rear door opening controls light-ing is deactivated if child safety isactivated.

V I S I B I L I T Y

Front door storage pockets WELCOME LIGHTING



94

Front door storage pocketsautomatic lighting

A white light is emitted to light up thedoor storage pockets.

Operation

The lighting comes on automaticallywhen you place your hand inside

the storage pocket. It goes out afew seconds after you remove yourhand.

WELCOME LIGHTING

With the door open, this lights up theground next to the vehicle.

Floor lighting

In the front and the rear of the vehicle,when a door is opened, this lights upthe interior of the vehicle.

The welcome lighting is made up of:

- The interior (roof) lamps.

- The floor lighting.

- The pavement lighting when adoor is open.

Pavement lighting

V I S I B I L I T Y

Front door storage pockets WELCOME LIGHTING



94

Front door storage pocketsautomatic lighting

A white light is emitted to light up thedoor storage pockets.

Operation

The lighting comes on automaticallywhen you place your hand inside

the storage pocket. It goes out afew seconds after you remove yourhand.

WELCOME LIGHTING

With the door open, this lights up theground next to the vehicle.

Floor lighting

In the front and the rear of the vehicle,when a door is opened, this lights upthe interior of the vehicle.

The welcome lighting is made up of:

- The interior (roof) lamps.

- The floor lighting.

- The pavement lighting when adoor is open.

Pavement lighting

L A Y O U T

SUN VISOR SKI FLAPAIR CONDITIONED



SUN VISOR

System which protects against sunfrom ahead or from the side andcourtesy system with illuminatedmirror.

SKI FLAP

A flap in the backrest, located to therear of the armrest, facilitates thecarrying of long objects.

With the ignition on, lift the flap;the mirror is illuminated automati-cally.

To prevent dazzle from ahead, foldthe visor downwards.

It can be disengaged from its centralfixing and pivoted over to the sidewindows if required.

AIR CONDITIONEDGLOVEBOX

To open the glovebox, pull on thehandle and lower the lid.

The glovebox has a manually closableair conditioning vent B .It has 2 or 3 sockets C to connectaudio/video equipment.

It has automatic lighting.

Whilst driving, the glove-box should be kept closed.

To open

Lower the rear armrest.

Pull the flap handle down. Lower the flap. Load the objects from inside the

boot.

Ensure that the objects are well se-cured and that they do not impedethe operation of the gear lever.

L A Y O U T

MATST id f t b i j d

Adjustment



96

Removing

Slide the seat back as far as pos-sible, unclip the fixings, remove the fixings, then the mat.

Refitting

Position the mat correctly, clip the fixings, check that the mat is held is

place correctly.

To avoid your feet becoming jammedunder the pedals:

- only use mats which are suit-able for the fixings alreadypresent in the vehicle. The useof these fixings is essential,

- never stack up more than 1 mat.

The use of a mat not approved byCITROËN may obstruct access tothe pedals and hinder the cruisecontrol/speed limiter function.

Floor mats approved by CITROËNare fitted with a 3rd fixing located inthe pedal area to avoid any risk ofinterference with the pedals.

FRONT ARMREST

Comfort and storage system for thedriver and front passenger.

j

To optimise your driving position:

lift the control A , push the armrest forwards.

The armrest returns to its initial posi-tion when you push it rearwards.

Lift the armrest to access the cupholder.

Equipment available for the driverand front passenger.

Cup-holder

L A Y O U T

Cup-holder SIDE BLINDSDriver's oddments tray



REAR ARMREST

Comfort and storage system for therear passengers.

The rear cup-holder A is located inthe rear central armrest.


Pull forwards to extract the cup-holder.

Storage Lift up the upper part of the rear

central armrest to access storagespace B .

12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET

Pull on the tab A and position theblind on the hook B .

REAR BLIND (SALOON)

pull on the tab C to unroll theblind,

position the blind on the hooksD .

This is located in the rear ashtray.

Max power: 100 W.

y

Pull the handle towards you.

L A Y O U T

SUN VISOR SKI FLAPAIR CONDITIONED



System which protects against sunfrom ahead or from the side andcourtesy system with illuminatedmirror.

A flap in the backrest, located to therear of the armrest, facilitates thecarrying of long objects.

With the ignition on, lift the flap;the mirror is illuminated automati-cally.

To prevent dazzle from ahead, foldthe visor downwards.

It can be disengaged from its centralfixing and pivoted over to the sidewindows if required.

GLOVEBOX

To open the glovebox, pull on thehandle and lower the lid.

The glovebox has a manually closable

air conditioning vent B .It has 2 or 3 sockets C to connectaudio/video equipment.

It has automatic lighting.

Whilst driving, the glove-box should be kept closed.

To open


Pull the flap handle down.

Lower the flap.

Load the objects from inside theboot.

Ensure that the objects are well se-cured and that they do not impedethe operation of the gear lever.

L A Y O U T

MATSTo avoid your feetbecoming jammed

Adjustment



96

Removing

Slide the seat back as far as pos-sible,

unclip the fixings, remove the fixings, then the mat.

Refitting


place correctly.






FRONT ARMREST







Cup-holder

L A Y O U T

MATSTo avoid your feetbecoming jammed

Adjustment



96

Removing

Slide the seat back as far as pos-sible,

unclip the fixings, remove the fixings, then the mat.

Refitting


place correctly.






FRONT ARMREST







Cup-holder

L A Y O U T




REAR ARMREST





Storage Lift up the upper part of the rear

central armrest to access storagespace B .



REAR BLIND (SALOON)


position the blind on the hooksD .


Max power: 100 W.


L A Y O U T




REAR ARMREST





Storage

Lift up the upper part of the rearcentral armrest to access storagespace B .



REAR BLIND (SALOON)


position the blind on the hooks D .


Max power: 100 W.


L A Y O U T

BOOT LAYOUT (SALOON) Luggage securing rings



98

1. Battery for vehicles with V6 HDiengine.

2. Pull strap (spare wheel storage).

3. Boot lamp.

4. 6 CD changer.

Use the 4 securing rings on theboot floor to secure your luggage.

For safety reasons, in case of theneed for sharp braking, you areadvised to place heavy objects asfar forward in the boot as possible.

L A Y O U T

BOOT LAYOUT (TOURER)



1. Hook

Allows you to hook shopping bags.

2. Torch

To recharge, return it to its stor-age position.

3. Storage net or Battery compart-ment (for vehicles with V6 2.7 HDiengine).

This provides access to the battery.

1. Luggage-cover blind

(see details on following page)

2. Luggage securing rings

Use the 4 stowing rings providedon the boot floor to secure yourloads.

For safety reasons in the eventof sharp braking, you are ad-vised to place heavy objects asfar forwards as possible.

3. Hooks

These allow a cargo net to be fitted(see details on following page).

1. Boot lamp

2. 12 V accessories socket(100 W maximum)

Cigar-lighter type 12 volts socket.It is located on the rear right-handtrim, and is supplied from the igni-tion position.

3. Loading assistance

You can change the height of thevehicle in order to make loadingor unloading easier.

4. Hook

Allows you to hook shopping bags.

5. Storage net or 6 CD changer

L A Y O U T

LUGGAGE COVER (TOURER) High load retaining net(Tourer)



100

To roll up

Press the handle (PRESS) gently.The luggage cover rolls up auto-matically.

The moving part A can be foldedalong the rear bench seat backrest.

To remove

Compress the control 1 and liftthe luggage cover on the rightthen on the left to remove it.

To install

Position the left-hand end of the lug-gage cover roller in its location B behind the rear bench seat.

Compress the roller control 1 and put the roller in place in itslocation C on the right.

Release the control to securethe luggage cover.

Unroll it to its fastening on theboot pillar.

(Tourer)

Hooked onto the special upper andlower fixings, this permits use of theentire loading volume up to the roof:

- behind the rear seats (row 2),

- behind the front seats (row 1)when the rear seats are folded.

When positioning the net, check thatthe strap loops are visible from theboot; this will make slackening ortightening easier.

L A Y O U T

Row 1 Row 2



Installation

fold down the backs of the rear

seats, position the high load retaining net

roller above the two rails 1 locatedbehind the rear seats (2/3 benchseat). The two notches 2 must beplaced above the two rails,

slide the two rails 1 into thenotches 2 and push the roller(lengthways) from right to left tosecure it,

reposition the rear seat backs.

To use it in row 1:

fold down thebacks of therear seats,

open the covers3 of the corre-sponding upperfixings,

unroll the high load retaining netand position one of the ends ofthe net's metal bar in the cor-responding fixing cover. Checkthat the hook is secured in therail located inside the cover 3 ,

pull the high load retaining net'smetal bar to position the otherhook in the second fixing cover.

To use it in row 2:

open the covers4 of the corre-sponding upperfixings,

from the rear bench seat, unroll thehigh load retaining net, pushing it todetach it from the retaining hooks,

position one of the ends of thenet's metal bar in the corre-sponding fixing cover. Checkthat the hook is secured in therail located inside the cover,

position the other hook in thesecond fixing cover and pull themetal bar towards you.

C H I L D S A F E T Y

GENERAL POINTS RELATINGTO CHILD SEATS

INSTALLING A CHILD SEAT USING

A THREE POINT SEAT BELT



102

* The rules for transporting children arespecific to each country. Consult thecurrent legislation in your country.

TO CHILD SEATS

Although one of CITROËN's maincriteria when designing your vehicle,the safety of your children alsodepends on you.

For maximum safety, please followthese precautions:- in accordance with European regu-

lations, all children under the ageof 12 or less than one metre fiftytall must travel in approved childseats suited to their weight ,on seats fitted with a seat belt orISOFIX* mountings,

- statistically, the safest seats inyour vehicle for the transpor-tation of children are the rearseats,

- a child weighing less than 9 kgmust travel in the "rearwards-facing" position both in thefront and in the rear.

CITROËN recommends that chil-dren should travel in the rear seats of your vehicle:

- "rearwards-facing" up to theage of 2,

- "forwards-facing" over theage of 2.

A THREE POINT SEAT BELT

"Rearwards-facing"

When a "rearwards-facing" child seatis installed on the front passengerseat , it is essential that the passen-ger air bag is disarmed. Otherwise,

the child would risk being seri-ously injured or killed if the airbag were to inflate.

"Forwards-facing"

When a "forwards-facing" child seatis installed on the front passengerseat , adjust the vehicle's seat to theintermediate longitudinal positionwith the seat back upright and leavethe passenger air bag armed.

Intermediate longitudinalposition


CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN



Passenger air bag OFF

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which aresecured using a three point seat belt :

Group 0: from birth to 10 kg

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg

L1 "RÖMER

Baby-Safe Plus"

Installed in therearwards-facing

position.

L2 "KIDDY Life"The use of

the restrainingcushion is

compulsory forthe transportationof young children(from 9 to 18 kg).

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L3 "RECARO Start''

L4 "KLIPPAN Optima"

From the ageof 6 years

(approximately

22 kg),the boosteris used on its own.


CHILD SEATS FITTED BY MEANS OF THE VEHICLE SEAT BELT



104

In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved childseats (a) using a seat belt, depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.

(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

(b) Consult the current legislation for your country before driving with your child in this seat.

(c) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shells and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.

U: seat position suitable for installation of universally approved rearwards-facing and/or forwards-facing child seat.

U (R): As U , with the vehicle seat, which must be adjusted to the highest position.

Seat position(s)

Weight of child

Groups 0 (c)and 0+< 13 kg

Group 1

9 to 18 kg Group 2

15 to 25 kg Group 3

22 to 36 kg

Row 1

Front passenger (b) withheight adjustment

U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)

Front passenger (b) withoutheight adjustment

U U U U

Row 2

Lateral rear U U U U

Central rear U U U U


"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS In the front In the rear



Your vehicle has been approved inaccordance with the new ISOFIX regulation s .

The rear side seats and the frontpassenger seat are fitted with regu-lation ISOFIX mountings.

These are three rings for the frontpassenger seat:

- two rings A , located between the

vehicle seat back and cushion,indicated by a label,

- a ring B , fixed at the bottom ofthe rear of the seat back, usedto secure the upper strap of thechild seat.

These are three rings for each rearside seat:

- two lower rings C , located be-tween the vehicle seat back andcushion, indicated by a label,

- an upper ring D , fixed to the rearshelf, concealed under a flapwith the logo TOP TETHER be-hind the head restraint.

Tourer

- two lower rings C , located be-tween the vehicle seat back and

cushion, indicated by a label,- an upper ring E , fixed to the

roof on the boot side, concealedunder a flap with the logo TOPTETHER.

Saloon


This ISOFIX mounting systemt f t li bl d

ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS



106

guarantees you fast, reliable andsafe fitting of the child seat in yourvehicle.

The ISOFIX child seats are fittedwith two locks which are securedeasily on the two rings A or C , fol-lowing installation of the guides(supplied with the seat).Some also have anupper strap whichis attached to the ringB , D orE .

To attach this strap in the front, raisethe vehicle seat's head restraintand pass the upper strap betweenthe rods of the head restraint.Then fix the hook on the ring B andtighten the upper strap.

To attach this strap in the rear, removethe vehicle seat's head restraint andstow it. Lift the cover on the rear shelf

(Saloon) or the roof (Tourer). Thenfix the hook on the ring D or E andtighten the upper strap.

The incorrect installation of a childseat in a vehicle compromises thechild's protection in the event of anaccident.

For information regarding theISOFIX child seats which can beinstalled in your vehicle, consultthe summary table for the locationof the ISOFIX child seats.

* According to country and currentlocal legislation.

Installing a booster seat

The chest part of the seat belt mustbe positioned on the child's shoulderwithout touching the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat

belt passes correctly over the child'sthighs.

CITROËN recommends the use ofa booster seat which has a back, fittedwith a seat belt guide at shoulder level.

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

- one or more children alone andunsupervised in a vehicle,

- a child or an animal in a vehiclewhich is exposed to the sun, with

the windows closed,- the keys within reach of childreninside the vehicle.

To prevent accidental opening of thedoors, use the "Child lock".

Take care not to open the rear win-dows by more than one third.

To protect young children from therays of the sun, fit side blinds on therear windows.

The incorrect installation of a childseat in a vehicle compromises thechild's protection in the event of anaccident.

Remember to fasten the seat beltsor the child seat harnesseskeepingthe slack in relation to the child'sbody to a minimum, even for short journeys.

For optimum installation of the "for-wards-facing" child seat, ensure thatthe back of the child seat is in con-tact with the back of the vehicle'sseat and that the head restraint doesnot cause any discomfort.

If the head restraint has to be re-moved, ensure that it is stored orattached securely to prevent it from

being thrown around the vehicle inthe event of sharp braking.

Children under the age of 10 mustnot travel in the "forwards-facing"position on the front passenger seat,unless the rear seats are already oc-cupied by other children, cannot beused or are absent.

Disarm the passenger air bag* whena "rearwards-facing" child seat isinstalled on the front seat. Otherwise,the child would risk being seriouslyinjured or killed if the air bag wereto inflate.


ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE



This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attachedto the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1 )

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upperring B , D or E , referred to as the TOP TETHER.

Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.


TABLE SUMMARISING THE LOCATION OF ISOFIX CHILD SEATS



108

In conformity with European law (ECE 16), this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seatsto seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX anchoring points.

For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G , is shown onthe child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.

IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an I sofix U niversal "F orwards-facing" seat attached using the top tether.

IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an I SOFIX S emi-U niversal child seat, either:

- "rearwards-facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support,

- "forwards-facing" fitted with a support,- a shell fitted with an upper strap or a support.

To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" paragraph.

X: Seat not suitable for installation of an ISOFIX seat of the size class indicated

Weight of child/ Age given as a guide

Up to 10 kg(group 0)

Up to around6 months

Up to 10 kg(group 0)

Up to 13 kg(group 0+)

Up to around 1 year

9 to 18 kg (group 1) Approx 1 to 3 years

Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell "Rearwards-facing" "Rearwards-facing" " Forwards -facing"

ISOFIX size class F G C D E C D A B B1

Universal and semi-universal

ISOFIX child seats can beinstalled on: - Front passenger seat

X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

- Lateral rear seats IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

- Central rear seat Non ISOFIX seat

* The ISOFIX shell, fixed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.


ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK Deactivation

Press button A again.



Activation

Press button A .The indicator light on buttonA comeson, accompanied by a message onthe instrument panel display.

Remote control system to preventopening of the rear doors using theirinterior controls and use of the rearelectric windows.

Press button A again.The indicator light on buttonA switchesoff, accompanied by a message onthe instrument panel display.This indicator light remains off untilthe child lock is activated.

This system is independent and in nocircumstances does it take the placeof the central locking control.Check the status of the child lock

each time you switch on the ignition. Always remove the key from theignition when leaving the vehicle,even for a short time.In the event of a serious impact,the electric child lock is deactivatedautomatically to permit the exit ofthe rear passengers.

Any other status of the indicatorlight indicates a malfunction of theelectric child lock. Have it checkedby a CITROËN dealer.

The control is located on the driver'sdoor, with the electric window controls.

S A F E T Y

DIRECTION INDICATORS HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

A i l i b f th

HORN

A dibl i t l t th d



110

Lower the lights stalk fully when

moving to the left. Raise the lights stalk fully when

moving to the right.

"Motorway" function

System for indicating a change oflane on a motorway.

Move the stalk briefly upwardsor downwards, without goingbeyond the resistance point;

the direction indicators will flash3 times.

This function can be used at anyspeed, but it is particularly usefulwhen changing lane on high-speedroads.

A visual warning by means of thedirection indicators to alert otherroad users to a vehicle breakdown,towing or accident.

Automatic lighting of hazardwarning lights

When braking in an emergency,depending on the deceleration, thehazard warning lights come on.

They will switch off automatically thefirst time you accelerate.

If they do not, press button A toswitch the direction indicators off.

Audible warning to alert other roadusers to an imminent danger.Selection of the left or right direction

indicators to signal a change of di-rection of the vehicle.

Press button A , the direction in-

dicators flash.They can operate with the ignition off.

As a safety precaution in a traffic jam, switch on the hazard warn-ing lights if you are the last in thequeue.

Press the left or right-hand partof the fixed centred controlssteering wheel.

Use the horn moderately and onlyin the following cases:

- immediate danger,

- when approaching an area

- where there is no visibility.

S A F E T Y


A i l i b f th

HORN

A dibl i t l t th d



110




"Motorway" function

















- immediate danger,



S A F E T Y


A i l i b f th

HORN

A dibl i t l t th d



110




"Motorway" function

















- immediate danger,



S A F E T Y

DEFLATION DETECTION Display of tyres in goodcondition

Deflated tyre



System which automatically checksthe pressure of the tyres while driving.

Choice of detection

This function warns you of tyres thatare deflated or punctured.

Automatic detection

Sensors monitor the tyre pressures.

In the event of an anomaly, a mes-sage will appear on the instrumentpanel screen.

Driver request detection

You can check the tyre pressures atany given moment. Press on button A (CHECK); the

information will be displayed onthe instrument panel screen.

Press on button A (CHECK).The system indicates to you that thetyres are correctly inflated.

This information is only available onthe request of the driver.

automatic detection

detection on request

Automatic detection:

A message indicates to you whichtyre is deflated.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the de-flated tyre(s).

The message is accompanied bythe SERVICE warning lamp lightingup and a beep.

Check the tyre pressures assoon as possible.

S A F E T Y

Punctured tyre Wheel not detected Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the



112

automatic detection



A message indicates to you whichtyre is punctured.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates thepunctured tyre(s).

The message is accompanied bythe STOP warning lamp lighting upand a beep.

automatic detection



A message indicates to you whichwheel is not detected.

wheel(s) which is/are not detected. The message is accompanied

by the SERVICE warning lamplighting up and an audible beep.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

If you have fitted wheels that

are not equipped with tyre defla-tion detection (wheels with snowtyres, etc.), contact a CITROËNdealer.

The deflation detection system is adriving aid, but which does not ab-solve the driver from the need to bevigilant and responsible.

This system does not dispense withthe requirement to check the tyreson a regular basis (see "Vehicle

identification"), to make sure thatthe vehicle is behaving correctlyand to avoid premature tyre weararising from driving too fast etc.Do not forget to check the pressurein the spare wheel.

Any repair or replacement of a tyreon a wheel that is equipped witha sensor must be carried out by aCITROËN dealer.The system may suffer from tem-porary interference caused by ra-

dio transmissions on neighbouringfrequencies.

S A F E T Y

BRAKING ASSISTANCESYSTEMS

Operating fault Emergency braking assistance

System which in an emergency



Group of supplementary systemswhich help you to obtain optimumbraking in complete safety in emer-gency situations:- the anti-lock braking system

(ABS),- the electronic brake force distri-

bution (EBFD),- the emergency braking assist-

ance (EBA).

Anti-lock braking systemand electronic brake forcedistribution

Linked systems which improve the

stability and manoeuvrability of yourvehicle when braking, in particularon poor or slippery surfaces.

Activation

The anti-lock braking system comesinto operation automatically whenthere is a risk of wheel lock.Normal operation of the ABS maymake itself felt by slight vibration ofthe brake pedal.

When braking in an emergency,press very firmly without releasingthe pressure.

If this warning light comeson, accompanied by an au-dible signal and a messageon the instrument panel dis-

play, it indicates a malfunction of theanti-lock braking system which could

result in loss of control of the vehiclewhen braking.

If this warning light comeson, together with the STOP and ABS warning lights, ac-companied by an audible

signal and a message on the instru-ment panel display, it indicates amalfunction of the electronic brakeforce distribution which could resultin loss of control of the vehicle whenbraking. You MUST stop as soon as it issafe to do so. In both cases, contact a CITROËNdealer.

When replacing wheels (tyres andrims), ensure that they conform tothe manufacturer's recommenda-tions.

System which, in an emergency,enables you to obtain the optimumbraking pressure more quickly, thusreducing the stopping distance.

Activation

It is triggered by the speed at whichthe brake pedal is pressed.

The effect of this is a reduction inthe resistance of the pedal and anincrease in braking efficiency.

When braking in an emergency,press firmly without releasing thepressure.

S A F E T Y

TRAJECTORY CONTROLSYSTEMS

Disarming

In exceptional conditions (starting ahi l hi h i b d d t k

For vehicles with Hydractive III+suspension, manual adjustment ofground clearance to the intermediate



114

Anti-skid regulation (ASR) andelectronic stability programme(ESP)

The anti-skid regulation optimisestraction to prevent skidding of thewheels, by acting on the brakes of thedriving wheels and on the engine.The electronic stability programmeacts on the brake of one or morewheels and on the engine to keepthe vehicle on the trajectory requiredby the driver.

Activation

These systems are activated auto-

matically each time the vehicle isstarted.They come into operation in the eventof a grip or trajectory problem.

This is indicated by flashingof this warning light on theinstrument panel.

vehicle which is bogged down, stuckin snow, on soft ground...), it maybe advisable to disarm the ASR andESP systems, so that the wheelscan move freely and regain grip.

Press the "ESP OFF" button, lo-cated in the centre of the fascia.

If this warning light comeson on the instrument paneland the indicator light on thebutton comes on, this indi-cates that the ASR and ESPsystems are disarmed.

Snow driving assistance(SNOW MOTION)

Your vehicle has a system to helpdriving on snow: SNOW MOTION. This automatic system continuouslychecks for situations of difficult sur-face adhesion that could make it dif-ficult to move off or make progresson deep fresh snow or compactedsnow.In these situations, the SNOWMOTION system takes over fromthe ASR system by optimising theamount of wheel slip to provide thebest traction and trajectory control,even without snow tyres and with orwithout chains.

ground clearance to the intermediateposition improves further the abilityto make progress in deep snow (seethe relevant paragraph).In extremely severe conditions (snowon top of ice, sand, deep mud…), itcan be useful to deactivate theESP/ASR systems to allow a degree ofwheel spin and so recover grip.

S A F E T Y

SEAT BELTS The pretensioning seat belts areactive when the ignition is on.The force limiter reduces the pres

Reactivation

These systems are reactivated au-t ti ll h ti th i iti i



Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted witha pretensioning system and forcelimiter.This system improves safety in thefront seats in the event of a frontimpact.

Depending on the seriousness of theimpact, the pretensioning systeminstantly tightens the seat beltagainst the body of the occupant.

Fastening

Pull the belt down in front of youin a steady movement, makingsure that it does not becometwisted.

Press the fastening into its buckle. Check that it is properly secured

and that the automatic lockingmechanism operates correctlyby pulling sharply on the beltstrap.

The abdominal part of the strapshould be positioned as low

down as possible in the lap andas tight as possible.

The chest part should be posi-tioned if possible in the channelof the shoulder.

Each belt has a reel that adjusts itslength automatically to the girth ofthe seat occupant.

The force limiter reduces the pres-sure of the seat belt against thechest of the occupant, so increasinghis protection.

tomatically each time the ignition isswitched back on or from 30 mph(50 km/h). Press the"ESP OFF" button again

to reactivate them manually.

Operating fault

If this warning light comeson, accompanied by an au-dible signal and a messageon the multifunction display,

this indicates a malfunction of thesesystems.Have the systems checked by aCITROËN dealer.

The ESP/ASR systems offer ex-ceptional safety in normal driving,but this should not encourage thedriver to take extra risks or drive athigh speed.The correct functioning of thesesystems depends on observationof the manufacturer's recommen-dations regarding the wheels (tyresand rims), the braking components,the electronic components and theCITROËN assembly and operation

procedures. After an impact, have these sys-tems checked by a CITROËNdealer.

S A F E T Y

SEAT BELTS The pretensioning seat belts areactive when the ignition is on.The force limiter reduces the pres

Reactivation

These systems are reactivated au-tomaticall each time the ignition is



Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted witha pretensioning system and forcelimiter.This system improves safety in thefront seats in the event of a frontimpact.

Depending on the seriousness of theimpact, the pretensioning systeminstantly tightens the seat beltagainst the body of the occupant.

Fastening

Pull the belt down in front of youin a steady movement, makingsure that it does not becometwisted.

Press the fastening into its buckle. Check that it is properly secured

and that the automatic lockingmechanism operates correctlyby pulling sharply on the beltstrap.

The abdominal part of the strapshould be positioned as low

down as possible in the lap andas tight as possible.

The chest part should be posi-tioned if possible in the channelof the shoulder.

Each belt has a reel that adjusts itslength automatically to the girth ofthe seat occupant.

The force limiter reduces the pres-sure of the seat belt against thechest of the occupant, so increasinghis protection.

tomatically each time the ignition isswitched back on or from 30 mph(50 km/h). Press the"ESP OFF" button again

to reactivate them manually.

Operating fault

If this warning light comeson, accompanied by an au-dible signal and a messageon the multifunction display,

this indicates a malfunction of thesesystems.Have the systems checked by aCITROËN dealer.

The ESP/ASR systems offer ex-ceptional safety in normal driving,but this should not encourage thedriver to take extra risks or drive athigh speed.The correct functioning of thesesystems depends on observationof the manufacturer's recommen-dations regarding the wheels (tyresand rims), the braking components,the electronic components and theCITROËN assembly and operation

procedures. After an impact, have these sys-tems checked by a CITROËNdealer.

S A F E T Y

Height adjustment Rear seat belts

Each rear seat is fitted with a three-



116

The correct positioning of the seatbelt reel is around mid-shoulderlevel. To adjust the belt, pinch the con-

trol and slide it in the direction

required.

Unfastening

To unfasten the belt, press onthe red button in the buckle.

The belt retracts automatically whennot in use.

Each rear seat is fitted with a threepoint inertia reel seat belt with forcelimiter.

Fastening

Pull the strap, then insert thetongue in the buckle.

Check that the seat belt is fas-tened correctly by pulling thestrap.

Unfastening

Press the red button on thebuckle.

S A F E T Y

The driver must ensure that passen-gers use the seat belts correctly andth t th ll t i d l

In order to be effective, a seat belt:- must be tightened as close to the

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the pas-



that they are all restrained securelybefore setting off.Wherever you are seated in the ve-hicle, always fasten your seat belt,even for short journeys.Do not invert the seat belt buckles

as they will not fulfil their role fully.The seat belts are fitted with an in-ertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strapto your size. The seat belt is storedautomatically when not in use.Before and after use, ensure that theseat belt is rolled up correctly.The lower part of the strap must bepositioned as low as possible on thepelvis.The upper part must be positioned

in the hollow of the shoulder.The inertia reels are fitted with an au-tomatic locking device which comesinto operation in the event of a colli-sion, emergency braking or if the ve-hicle rolls over. You can release thedevice by pulling rapidly on the strapand releasing it.

gbody as possible,

- must restrain one person of adultsize only,

- must not bear any trace of cutsor fraying,

- must be pulled in front of you witha smooth movement, checkingthat it does not twist,

- must not be transformed or mod-ified to avoid altering its perform-ance.

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old orshorter than one metre fifty.Never use the same seat belt to se-cure more than one person.Never allow a child to travel on your lap.

In accordance with current safetyregulations, all repairs and checksmust be carried out by a CITROËNdealer who guarantees that the work

is carried out correctly.Have your seat belts checked regu-larly by a CITROËN dealer and par-ticularly if the straps show signs ofdamage.Clean the seat belt straps with soapywater or a textile cleaning product,sold by CITROËN dealers. After folding or moving a seat or rearbench seat, ensure that the seat beltis positioned and rolled up correctly.

Depending on the nature and se-riousness of the impacts , the pre-tensioning device may be triggeredbefore and independently of the airbags. Triggering of the pre-tension-ers is accompanied by a slight dis-charge of harmless smoke and anoise, due to the activation of thepyrotechnic cartridge incorporated

in the system.In all cases, the air bag warning lightcomes on.Following an impact, have the seatbelts system checked, and if neces-sary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer.

S A F E T Y

AIR BAGS

System designed to maximisef f (

Impact detection zones Front air bags

System which protects the head and



118

the safety of the occupants (withthe exception of the rear centrepassenger) in the event of violentcollisions. It supplements the actionof the force-limiting seat belts.

If a collision occurs, the electronicdetectors record and analyse thefront and side impacts sustained inthe impact detection zones:

- in the case of a serious impact,the air bags are triggered instant-ly and protect the occupants ofthe vehicle (with the exception ofthe rear centre passenger); im-mediately after the impact, theair bags deflate rapidly so thatthey do not hinder visibility or theexit of the occupants,

- in the case of a minor or rear im-pact or in certain roll-over con-ditions, the air bags will not betriggered; the seat belt alone issufficient to provide optimumprotection in these situations.

The air bags do not operate whenthe ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only operateonce. If a second impact occurs (dur-ing the same or a subsequent acci-dent), the air bag will not operate.

A. Front impact zone.

B. Side impact zone.

Triggering of the air bag(s) is ac-companied by a slight emission ofharmless smoke and a noise, due tothe activation of the pyrotechnic car-tridge incorporated in the system.

This smoke is not harmful, but sen-sitive individuals may experienceslight irritation.The noise of the detonation mayresult in a slight loss of hearing fora short time.

y pchest of the driver and front passen-ger in the event of a front impact.

The driver's air bag is incorporatedin the centre of the steering wheel;the front passenger's air bag is in-corporated in the fascia above the

glove box.

Activation

The air bags are triggered simultane-ously, unless the passenger's frontair bag is disarmed, in the event ofa serious front impact applied to allor part of the front impact zone A ,in the longitudinal centreline of thevehicle on a horizontal plane and di-rected from the front to the rear of

the vehicle.The front air bag inflates betweenthe front occupant of the vehicle andthe fascia to cushion his forwardmovement.

S A F E T Y

Deactivation Activation

When you remove the child seat,turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to



This warning light comes onon the roof console displaywhen the ignition is on anduntil the air bag is re-armed.

To guarantee the safety of your child,it is imperative that the passengerair bag is disarmed when you install

a "rearwards-facing" child seat onthe front passenger seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk be-ing seriously injured or killed if theair bag were triggered.

turn switch 1 to the ON position tore-arm the air bag and so guaranteethe safety of your front passenger inthe event of an impact.

Operating fault

If this symbol appears onthe instrument panel dis-play, accompanied by anaudible warning and a mes-

sage, contact a CITROËN dealer tohave the system checked. The airbags may no longer be triggered inthe event of a serious impact.

Only the front passenger's air bagcan be disarmed: with the ignition off , insert the

key in the passenger air bag dis-arming switch 1 ,

turn it to the "OFF" position, then, remove the key keeping

the switch in this position.If this warning light flashes,contact a CITROËN dealer.

If both air bag warning lights come

on continuously, do not install a"rearwards-facing" child seat onthe front passenger seat.

Have it checked by a CITROËNdealer.

S A F E T Y

For the air bags to be fullyeffective, observe the followingsafety rules:



safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.Do not leave anything between theoccupants and the air bags (a child,pet, object...). This could hamper theoperation of the air bags or injure theoccupants.

After an accident or if the vehiclehas been stolen or broken into, havethe air bag systems checked. All work on the air bag system isstrictly forbidden unless it is carriedout by qualified personnel of theCITROËN network.Even if all of the precautions men-tioned are observed, a risk of injuryor of minor burns to the head, chestor arms when an air bag is triggeredcannot be ruled out. The bag inflatesalmost instantly (within a few mil-liseconds) then deflates within thesame time discharging the hot gasvia openings provided for this pur-pose.

Front air bags

Do not drive holding the steeringwheel by its spokes or resting yourhands on the centre part of thewheel.Passengers must not place their feeton the fascia.Smoke as little as possible as de-ployment of the air bags can causeburns or the risk of injury from a cig-arette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steeringwheel or hit it violently.

Side air bagsPut approved covers only on theseats. These will not hinder infla-tion of the side air bags. Consult aCITROËN dealer.Do not fix or glue anything to theseat backs. This could cause injuryto the chest or arms if the side airbag is triggered.Do not sit with the upper part of thebody any nearer to the door thannecessary.

Curtain air bags

Do not fix or glue anything to the roof.This could cause injury to the head ifthe curtain air bag is triggered.Do not remove the grab handles in-stalled on the roof, they play a partin securing the curtain air bags.

S A F E T Y

Side air bags*

System which protects the driver

Impact detection zones Activation

It is triggered at the same time asthe corresponding side air bag in the



120 * According to country.

and front passenger in the event ofa serious side impact in order to limitthe risk of injury to the chest.Each side air bag is incorporatedin the front seat back frame, on thedoor side.

Activation

It is triggered unilaterally in theevent of a serious side impact ap-plied to all or part of the side impactzone B , perpendicular to the longi-tudinal centreline of the vehicle ona horizontal plane and directed fromthe outside towards the inside of thevehicle.The side air bag inflates between

the front occupant of the vehicle andthe corresponding door trim pad.

A. Front impact zone.

B. Side impact zone.

Curtain air bags*

System which protects the driverand passengers (with the exceptionof the rear centre passenger) in theevent of a serious side impact in or-der to limit the risk of head injuries.Each curtain air bag is incorporatedin the pillars and the upper part ofthe passenger compartment.

the corresponding side air bag in theevent of a serious side impact appliedto all or part of the side impact zoneB , perpendicular to the longitudinalcentreline of the vehicle on a horizon-tal plane and directed from the outsidetowards the inside of the vehicle.The curtain air bag inflates betweenthe front or rear occupant of the ve-hicle and the windows.

Operating fault

In the event of a minor impact orbump on the side of the vehicle orif the vehicle rolls over, the air bagmay not be triggered.The air bag is not triggered in theevent of a rear or front collision.

If this symbol appears onthe instrument panel display,accompanied by an audiblesignal and a message, con-

tact a CITROËN dealer to have the

system checked. The air bags mayno longer be triggered in the eventof a serious impact.


S A F E T Y

For the air bags to be fullyeffective, observe the followingsafety rules:



safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.Do not leave anything between theoccupants and the air bags (a child,pet, object...). This could hamper theoperation of the air bags or injure theoccupants.

After an accident or if the vehiclehas been stolen or broken into, havethe air bag systems checked. All work on the air bag system isstrictly forbidden unless it is carriedout by qualified personnel of theCITROËN network.Even if all of the precautions men-tioned are observed, a risk of injuryor of minor burns to the head, chest

or arms when an air bag is triggeredcannot be ruled out. The bag inflatesalmost instantly (within a few mil-liseconds) then deflates within thesame time discharging the hot gasvia openings provided for this pur-pose.

Front air bags

Do not drive holding the steeringwheel by its spokes or resting yourhands on the centre part of thewheel.Passengers must not place their feeton the fascia.Smoke as little as possible as de-ployment of the air bags can causeburns or the risk of injury from a cig-arette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steeringwheel or hit it violently.

Side air bagsPut approved covers only on theseats. These will not hinder infla-tion of the side air bags. Consult aCITROËN dealer.Do not fix or glue anything to theseat backs. This could cause injuryto the chest or arms if the side airbag is triggered.Do not sit with the upper part of thebody any nearer to the door thannecessary.

Curtain air bags

Do not fix or glue anything to the roof.This could cause injury to the head ifthe curtain air bag is triggered.Do not remove the grab handles in-stalled on the roof, they play a partin securing the curtain air bags.

D R I V I N G

MANUAL PARKING BRAKE Release

Press on the end of the leverwhilst pulling it then lower it fully.



122

Mechanical device for immobilisingthe vehicle when stationary.

This warning lamp comeson if the parking brake is en-gaged or not fully released.

If the parking brake is released, the lighting of this warning lampalong with the STOP warning lampindicates an insufficient level ofbrake fluid or a malfunction of thebraking distribution.It is essential to stop the vehicle. Consult a CITROËN dealer.

Application Pull the parking brake to immobi-

lise your vehicle.To facilitate the action on the lever,you are recommended to press thebrake pedal at the same time.

In all circumstances, as aprecautionary measure,engage first gear.

On steep gradients, turn the steer-ing wheel towards the pavement.

whilst pulling it then lower it fully.

D R I V I N G

ELECTRONIC PARKINGBRAKE

Automatic operation

Application with the engine off Application with the engine running



The electronic parking brake com-bines 2 operational modes:

- AUTOMATIC Automatic application when theengine stops and automatic re-lease on use of the accelerator(automatic operation by default),

- MANUAL

Permanent manual application/release of the parking brake ispossible by pulling control A while pressing the brake pedal.

With the vehicle stationary, the park-ing brake is automatically appliedwhen the engine is switched off.

The application of the parking brakeis confirmed by:

With the engine running and the ve-hicle stationary, in order to immobi-lise the vehicle you need to manuallyapply the parking brake by pulling on control A .

The application of the parking brakeis confirmed by:- the lighting of the warning

lamp on control A and onthe instrument panel,

Before leaving the vehicle,check that warning lamp P on the instrument panel ispermanently lit.

Never leave a child alone inside thevehicle with the ignition on, as theycould release the parking brake.

- the display of a message "parkingbrake applied" on the instrumentpanel display.

An operation sound will confirm toyou the application/release of yourelectronic parking brake.

- the lighting of warninglamp P on control A andon the instrument panel,

- the display of a message "park-ing brake applied" on the instru-ment panel display.

When the driver’s door is opened, abeep is heard and a message dis-played if the parking brake has notbeen applied.

Before leaving the vehicle,check that warning lamp P on the instrument panel ispermanently lit.

D R I V I N G

Release

The electronic parking brake releasesautomatically and progressively

Activation/Deactivation of theautomatic functions

The automatic application when the

Manual operation

Manual application/release of theparking brake is always possible



124

y p g ywhen you press the accelerator:

with a manual gearbox (firstgear or reverse gear engaged),press down fully on the clutchpedal then press on the accel-erator pedal and move off.

with an automatic gearbox , ac-celerate with the selector in posi-tion D , M or R .

Full release of the parking brake isconfirmed by:

- the extinction of warninglamp P on control A andon the instrument panel,

- the display of a message "park-ing brake released" on the instru-ment panel display.

When stationary, with the enginerunning, do not press the accelera-tor pedal unnecessarily (particularly

when starting the engine, includingin neutral), as you may release theparking brake.

ppengine is switched off and the au-tomatic release when you pressthe accelerator can be deactivated. Activation/deactivation is performedusing the configuration menu of theinstrument panel display. To do so,

select "Personalisation/Configuration/Define the Vehicle parameters/Drivingassistance/Automatic handbrake".

The deactivation of thesefunctions is confirmed by thelighting of this warning lampon the instrument panel.

With the automatic functions deacti-vated, the application and release ofthe parking brake are done manually.

The deactivation of theautomatic functions is rec-ommended in particularlycold conditions (ice) andduring towing (breakdown,caravan...).

parking brake is always possible.

Application

With the vehicle stationary, to applythe parking brake whether the engineis running or off, pull on control A .


- the lighting of the warning lampon control A and of warninglamp P on the instrument panel,


When the driver’s door isopened with the engine run-ning, a beep is heard and

a message displayed if the parkingbrake has not been applied.

D R I V I N G

Release

The electronic parking brake releasesautomatically and progressively

Activation/Deactivation of theautomatic functions

The automatic application when the

Manual operation

Manual application/release of theparking brake is always possible



124

y p g ywhen you press the accelerator:

with a manual gearbox (firstgear or reverse gear engaged),press down fully on the clutchpedal then press on the accel-erator pedal and move off.

with an automatic gearbox , ac-celerate with the selector in posi-tion D , M or R .

Full release of the parking brake isconfirmed by:

- the extinction of warninglamp P on control A andon the instrument panel,


When stationary, with the enginerunning, do not press the accelera-tor pedal unnecessarily (particularly

when starting the engine, includingin neutral), as you may release theparking brake.

engine is switched off and the au-tomatic release when you pressthe accelerator can be deactivated. Activation/deactivation is performedusing the configuration menu of theinstrument panel display. To do so,

select "Personalisation/Configuration/Define the Vehicle parameters/Drivingassistance/Automatic handbrake".

The deactivation of thesefunctions is confirmed by thelighting of this warning lampon the instrument panel.

With the automatic functions deacti-vated, the application and release ofthe parking brake are done manually.

The deactivation of theautomatic functions is rec-ommended in particularlycold conditions (ice) andduring towing (breakdown,caravan...).

parking brake is always possible.

Application

With the vehicle stationary, to applythe parking brake whether the engineis running or off, pull on control A .


- the lighting of the warning lampon control A and of warninglamp P on the instrument panel,


When the driver’s door isopened with the engine run-ning, a beep is heard and

a message displayed if the parkingbrake has not been applied.

D R I V I N G

Release

With the ignition on or the enginerunning, to release the parking

Maximum application

If necessary, you can utilise maxi-mum application of the parking

Particular situations

In certain situations (starting theengine ) the parking brake can



brake, press on the brake pedal,push then release control A .

The full application of the parkingbrake is confirmed by:

- the extinction of the warn-ing lamp on control A andof warning lamp P on theinstrument panel,


If you push control A without press-ing the brake pedal, the parkingbrake will not be released and themessage "Foot on brake necessary"will be displayed on the instrumentpanel.

When stationary, with theengine running, do notpress the accelerator pedalunnecessarily, as you mayrelease the parking brake.

mum application of the parkingbrake. It is obtained by means of along pull on control A , until you seethe message "Max application of theparking brake" and a beep is heard.

Maximum application is essential:

- in the case of a vehicle towinga caravan or a trailer, if the au-tomatic functions are activatedbut you are applying the parkingbrake manually,

- when the gradient you are parkedon is variable in its effect (e.g. ona ferry, in a lorry, during towing).

- In the case of towing, a loadedvehicle or parking on a gradient,turn the front wheels towards thepavement and engage a gear

when you park.- After a maximum application, the

release time will be longer.

engine...), the parking brake canautomatically alter its force. This isnormal operation.

To advance your vehicle a few cen-timetres without starting the engine,but with the ignition on, press on the

brake pedal and release the parkingbrake by pushing then releasing control A .

The full release of the parking brakeis confirmed by the extinction ofwarning lamp P (red) on the instru-ment panel and the display of amessage "parking brake released"on the instrument panel display.

If the parking brake malfunctionswhile applied or if the battery runs flat , an emergency release is

always possible.To guarantee correct operation ofthe parking brake and thereforeyour safety, the number of succes-sive application/release operationsis limited to eight.

If this number is exceeded, you arewarned by the message "Parkingbrake faulty" and a warning lampflashes.

D R I V I N G

Dynamic emergency braking If a failure of the ESP sys-tem is signalled by the light-ing of this warning lamp,then braking stability is not

Emergency unlocking



126

In the event of a failure of the vehi-cle’s main braking system or in anexceptional situation (e.g. driver tak-en ill, under instruction, etc) pull and

hold control A to stop the vehicle.The electronic stability programme(ESP) provides stability during dy-namic emergency braking.If the dynamic emergency brakingmalfunctions, one of the followingmessages will be displayed on theinstrument panel display:- "Parking brake faulty".- "Parking brake control faulty".

then braking stability is notguaranteed. In this event, stabilitymust be assured by the driver byrepeating alternate "pull release" ac-tions on control A .

The dynamic emergencybraking must only be usedin exceptional circum-stances.

In the event of the electronic parkingbrake malfunctioning or the batteryrunning flat, an emergency man-ual device can unlock the parkingbrake.

Immobilise the vehicle, with theengine running, by engaging firstgear (manual gearbox) or posi-tion P (automatic gearbox), thenswitch off the engine.If it is impossible to immobilisethe vehicle, do not action thecontrol and urgently contact aCITROËN dealer.

D R I V I N G

This strap does not permitapplication of the parkingbrake.



Fetch the vehicle chock locatedin the boot.

Immobilise the vehicle by placingthe chock at the front or at therear of one of the rear wheels.

Open the lower compartment ofthe centre armrest by pulling it.

Ensure that the cup holder B isretracted.

Remove the rubber mat coveringthe base of the armrest.

b a eTo re-engage the electronic parkingbrake (after rectifying the malfunc-tion or battery failure), give a longpull on the control A until the park-ing brake warning lamp (!) flashes

on the instrument panel then give asecond long pull until this warninglamp is lit permanently.The time required for the subse-quent application may be longerthan during normal operation.It is essential that the ignition isnot switched on until the parkingbrake has re-engaged (flashing ofthe warning lamp (!) on the instru-ment panel then warning lamp litpermanently) to avoid damage tothe parking brake.Take care not to allow moisture ordust in the proximity of the diagnos-tic socket D which is essential forthe maintenance of your vehicle.

Release the strap from its location C . Pull the strap to release the

brake. A loud knock confirms therelease of the brake.

Take care to put the strapback in its location C correct-ly. Otherwise, it will no longer

be possible to apply the brake.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

Put the rubber mat back in placeon the base of the armrest.

Remove and stow the chock.

D R I V I N G

Operating anomalies

If f th i t i t t CITROËN d l ibl



128

If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES

1

Electronic parking brake fault and display ofmessage "Parking brake faulty " and the fol-lowing warning lamps:

If the electronic parking brake fault warning lamp and the servicewarning lamp light up, position the vehicle in a safe location (on flatground, with a gear engaged).

2

Display of the messages "Parking brakefaulty " and "Anti roll-back fault " and of thefollowing warning lamps:

- The automatic functions are deactivated.

- The hill start assist is unavailable.- The electronic parking brake is only available manually.

3

Display of messages "Parking brake faulty "and "Anti roll-back fault " and of the follow-ing warning lamp:

- The manual unlocking of the electronic parking brake is una-vailable.

- The hill start assist is unavailable.

- The automatic functions and manual application are still avail-able.

D R I V I N G

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES

Display of messages "Parking brake faulty"- The automatic functions are deactivated.



4

Display of messages Parking brake faulty and "Anti roll-back fault " and of the follow-ing warning lamps:

and/or flashing

- The hill start assist is unavailable.To apply the electronic parking brake: Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum application. Switch on the ignition and check that the electronic parking

brake warning lamps are on.- Application may take longer than in normal operation.- If warning lamp (!) flashes or if the warning lamps do not come

on when the ignition is switched on, this method does not work.Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer.

To release the electronic parking brake: Switch on the ignition. Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.

5

Display of message "Parking brake controlfaulty – automatic mode activated " and thefollowing warning lamps:

and/or flashing

- Only the functions for automatic application on switching off theengine and automatic release on acceleration are available.

- Manual application/release of the electronic parking brake anddynamic emergency braking are unavailable.

6

Display of message "Parking brake faulty "and of the following warning lamp:

flashing

- Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.- The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.It this situation arises: Wait approximately 3 minutes. After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still flashing, try to reini-

tialise the parking brake, either by pushing and releasing thecontrol A while pressing the brake pedal or by means of a long

pull on control A .

7

Battery fault - Lighting of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop thevehicle as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.

- Apply the electronic parking brake before switching off the en-gine.

D R I V I N G

HILL START ASSIST

System which keeps your vehicle

Operation



130

y p yimmobilised temporarily (approxi-mately 2 seconds) when starting ona gradient, the time it takes to moveyour foot from the brake pedal to theaccelerator pedal.

This function is only active when:- the vehicle is completely station-

ary, with your foot on the brakepedal,

- in particular conditions on aslope,

- with the driver’s door closed.

The hill start assist function cannotbe deactivated.

On an ascending slope, with thevehicle stationary, the vehicle isheld for a brief moment when yourelease the brake pedal:

- provided you are in first gear orneutral on a manual gearbox,

- provided you are in D or M on anautomatic gearbox.

On a descending slope, with thevehicle stationary and reversegear engaged, the vehicle is heldfor a brief moment when you re-lease the brake pedal.

Do not exit the vehiclewhile it is being held in thehill start assist phase.

If you need to exit the vehicle withthe engine running, manually applythe parking brake and ensure thatthe parking brake warning lamp (onthe instrument panel) and the warn-

ing lamp P (on the control lever A )are permanently on.

D R I V I N G

5-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX 6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX AUTOMATIC GEARBOX



Starting the vehicle

Check that the gear lever is inneutral.

Do not touch the accelerator. For Diesel engines: turn the key

to position M and wait until thepre-heating warning light switch-es off if it has come on.

Operate the starter, turning thekey until the engine starts (nomore than ten seconds).

In temperatures lower than 0 °C,declutch whilst turning the starterto facilitate starting.

Engaging reverse gear

Push the gear lever to the rightthen rearwards.

Only engage reverse gear when thevehicle is stationary with the engineat idle.


Raise the ring under the knoband push the gear lever to the

left then forwards.Only engage reverse gear when thevehicle is stationary with the engineat idle.

As a safety precaution and to facili-tate starting of the engine:

- always select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

Automatic gearbox which offers achoice between the comfort of fullyautomatic operation, enhanced by

the sport and snow programmes, ormanual gear changing.

Therefore, you have a choice of fourdriving modes:

- automatic operation for elec-tronic control of the gears by thegearbox,

- the SPORT programme for amore dynamic driving style,

- the SNOW programme to im-prove driving when the grip ispoor,

- manual operation for sequen-tial changing of the gears by thedriver.

D R I V I N G
















As a safety precaution and to facili-tate starting of the engine:

- always select neutral,



the sport and snow programmes, ormanual gear changing.

Therefore, you have a choice of fourdriving modes:

- automatic operation for elec-tronic control of the gears by thegearbox,




D R I V I N G
















As a safety precaution and to facili-tate starting of the engine:- always select neutral,



the sport and snow programmes, ormanual gear changing.Therefore, you have a choice of fourdriving modes:- automatic operation for elec-

tronic control of the gears by thegearbox,




D R I V I N G

Mode selection Displays on the instrument panel



132

automatic mode: selector in po-sition D ,

sequential mode: selector in po-

sition M , SPORT mode: selector in posi-

tion D and button A pressed, SNOW mode: selector in posi-

tion D and button B pressed.

The position of the selector and thedriving mode are displayed on theinstrument panel dialC . A position grille relating to the selec-tor allows you to view the positionthat is selected.

For safety:- position P can be dis-

engaged only if youpress the brake pedal,

- when a door is opened, a soundsignal is heard if the selector isnot in position P ,

- always make sure that the se-lector is in position P before

you leave your vehicle.If the gearbox is in position P butthe position of the selector is differ-ent, reposition the selector onP sothat you can start the vehicle.

D R I V I N G

Moving off

To start the engine, the selectorh t b i iti P N

Park

This position of the selectoris sed to pre ent the ehi

Reverse gear

Only engage this positionhen the ehicle is station



Never select positions P orR if the vehicle is not sta-

tionary.If, while the vehicle is mov-ing, position N is engaged inad-vertently, allow the engine to idlebefore engaging positionD or M .

has to be in position P or N . Action the starter. When the engine is running,

place the selector on R , D or Mas required.

Check, in the instrument panel,the position engaged.

Release the brake pedal and ac-celerate.

To avoid incoherence betweenthe position of the selector andthe actual position of the gear-box, always exit from position P when you switch on the ignitionand press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, when the ignition is on orthe engine is running:

reposition the selector in position P , put your foot on the brake ped-

al and then select the gear youwant.

is used to prevent the vehi-cle from moving when youare stationary.

To select position P, move theselector back to the highest po-

sition (towards R ), then push itforwards and then to the left. To exit position P , move the se-

lector to the right and then to theposition you want.

Only engage this position whenthe vehicle is completely sta-tionary. In this position, the frontwheels are locked. Make surethat the selector is correctly po-sitioned.

when the vehicle is station-ary. To prevent snatching,do not accelerate too soonafter selection.

Neutral

Never select position N ifthe vehicle is moving.

D R I V I N G

Automatic operation When braking, the gearbox maychange down automatically in orderto provide effective engine braking.If you lift your foot off the accelera-

- If the vehicle stops or reducesspeed (for example when ap-proaching a stop sign), the gearboxchanges down automatically to first



134

Move the selector to position D .The gearbox constantly selects thegear that is best suited to the follow-

ing parameters:- driving style,

- road profile

- vehicle load.

The gearbox operates without requir-ing any intervention on your part.For certain manoeuvres (for exam-ple overtaking), you can obtain max-imum acceleration by pressing theaccelerator pedal hard down pastthe mechanical force zone (point ofresistance), which then produces anautomatic change down to a lowergear.

If you lift your foot off the accelerator abruptly, the gearbox will not en-gage a higher gear.

Manual operation

Position of the selector for manualgear changing. Move the selector to position M . Push the selector towards the

"+ " sign to change up a gear. Pull the selector towards the "- "

sign to change down a gear.

gear.- In sequential mode, it is not nec-

essary to release the acceleratorduring gear changes.

- A request to change gear is ac-

cepted only if the engine speedpermits it.

- The SPORT and SNOW modesdo not operate in sequentialmode.

D R I V I N G

SPORT and SNOWprogrammes - a marked snatching

may be felt when se-lecting R for reversegear

SNOW programme " "

With the lever in positionD and theengine running, press buttonB .

The gearbox adapts to driving on



gear,- if an operating fault occurs,

the gearbox is locked ina gear, do not exceed aspeed of 60 mph (approx.100 km/h).

- do not switch off your engine ifthe gear selector is in positionD or R .

Consult a CITROËN dealer.

SPORT programme "S"

These two special programmes sup-plement the automatic operation invery particular conditions of use.

With the lever in positionD and the engine run-ning, press button A .

The gearbox adapts to driving onslippery roads.This programme makes moving offeasier and improves traction in con-ditions of poor grip.

appears on the instru-ment panel.

The gearbox automatically favours adynamic driving style.

S appears on the instrument panel.

Return to automatic operation

At any time, press the button se-lected again to exit from the pro-gramme engaged and return to

auto-adaptive mode.

DR I V I N G

FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHEEL

Rotation

- Scrolling of the various pages of information on the instrument panel display.

- Movement through the various menus on the instrument panel display



136

1

Rotation Movement through the various menus on the instrument panel display.

- Increasing/decreasing of the values.

Short press- Opening of the menu on the instrument panel display (only when stationary).- Selection and confirmation of the information.

Long press Trip computer zero reset (if the trip computer page is displayed).

2 Short press

- Cancellation of the current operation.- Return to the previous screen on the instrument panel display.

Long press Return to the initial screen on the instrument panel display.

3 Short press Increasing of the speed in steps of 1 km/h (1 mph)/storing of the speed.

Maintained press Increasing of the speed in steps of 5 km/h (5 mph).

4 Short press Decreasing of the speed in steps of 1 km/h (1 mph)/storing of the speed.

Maintained press Decreasing of the speed in steps 5 km/h (5 mph).

5 Short pressSuspension or resumption of the cruise control/speed limiter (depending onthe mode selected).

6 Short pressSelection of the cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on thisbutton will always begin with selection of the speed limiter).

7 Short press Deactivation of the cruise control/speed limiter.

8 Short press

- Pick up an incoming call.- Hang up the current call.- Opening of the telephone short-cut menu.- Confirmation on the list and the telephone menu.

Long press Refuse an incoming call.

9 Short press/Long press Horn.

10 Short press Activation/deactivation of the Black Panel mode (night driving).

11 Short press Activation of the voice command.

Long press Navigation instruction repeat.

DR I V I N G

Rotation

- Radio source: Scrolling of the pre-set stations.

- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Scrolling of the CDs ordirectories.On the multifunction display menus: Movement and increasing/decreasing



12 - On the multifunction display menus: Movement and increasing/decreasing.

Short press- On the multifunction display menus: confirmation.

- Opening of the short-cut menus (in accordance with the multifunctiondisplay page).

Long press Opening of the multifunction display main menu.

13 Short press

Cancellation of the current operation and return to the previous screen onthe multifunction display.When an incoming telephone call is received: Refuse the call.

Long press Return to the initial screen on the multifunction display.

14 Short press Access to the multifunction display general menu.

15 Short press/Maintained press Volume increase.

16 Short press/Maintained press Volume decrease.

17 Short press- First press: mute.- Second press: restoring of the sound.

18 Short press

- Radio source: Automatic search of higher frequencies.- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the next track.

Maintained press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast forward play.

19 Short press

- Radio source: Automatic search of lower frequencies.- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the previous track.

Maintained press CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Rewind.

20 Short press

- Radio source: displaying of the list of radio stations available.- CD/MP3 CD and CD changer source: displaying of the list of CD tracks

and directories.

- Jukebox source: displaying of the list of albums.Long press Updating of the list of radio stations.

21 Short press/Long press Horn.

22 Short press MODE: selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction display.

D R I V I N G

SPEED LIMITER

System which prevents the vehi-cle from exceeding the speed pro-grammed by the driver

Displays on the instrument panel



138

grammed by the driver.When the limit speed is reached, theaccelerator pedal no longer has anyeffect.The speed limiter is switched

on manually: a speed of at least20 mph (approx. 30 km/h) must beprogrammed.The speed limiter can in no wayreplace respect for speed limits orvigilance and responsibility on thepart of the driver.

Steering wheel controls

The speed limiter switches are lo-

cated on the left-hand side of thesteering wheel.

The speed limiter information is dis-played in zone A of the instrumentpanel.

Programming

Press on button 4 to select speedlimiter mode "LIMIT ".

The selection is confirmed by thedisplay of the function in zone A ofthe instrument panel.

Activation

Press on button 3 when the de-sired maximum speed is dis-played.

The information "ON" then appearsin zone A .When the function is selected, the

last memorised speed and the infor-mation "PAUSE" are displayed.With the engine running, you canadjust the memorised maximumspeed, displayed in zone A , bypressing on: Button 1 to increase the memo-

rised maximum speed. Button 2 to decrease the memo-

rised maximum speed.

Successive presses will modify thecruise speed in steps of 1 mph and acontinuous press in steps of 5 mph.

D R I V I N G

Return to normal driving

Press on button 5 . Select the speed limiter function.



In the event of a steep descent or

under excessive acceleration, thespeed limiter (which does not acton the brakes) may not be able toprevent the vehicle from exceedingthe programmed speed.Use of a floor mat other than thatrecommended by CITROËN mayaffect the normal operation of theaccelerator pedal and hamper theoperation of the speed limiter.Floor mats approved by CITROËNare fitted with a 3rd fixing located inthe pedal area to avoid any risk of

interference with the pedals.

Suspension/Resumption

Press on button 3 .This action causes the information"PAUSE" to appear in zone A of theinstrument panel.

This action does not cancel thememorised maximum speed whichremains displayed in zone A of theinstrument panel.

Overriding the programmedspeed

The accelerator pedal has an end-

of-travel switch. In order to exceedthe memorised maximum speed atany time, you can press the pedalall the way down. While the speedis being exceeded, the speed dis-played in zone A will flash. You haveonly to release the accelerator pedalto return below the maximum speed,to restore the function.The speed will also flash if the speedlimiter is not able to prevent the vehi-cle from exceeding the programmedspeed (e.g. on a steep descent or

under excessive acceleration).To reactivate the speed limiter, re-lease the accelerator to slow to aspeed lower than the programmedspeed.

Or stop the engine.

Operating fault

If there is a malfunction, a mes-sage is displayed accompanied bya sound signal and lighting of theSERVICE warning lamp.Have it checked by a CITROËNdealer.

D R I V I N G

CRUISE CONTROL

System which automatically main-tains the vehicle speed programmedby the driver without any action on

Displays on the instrumentpanel

Once the desired speed has beenreached using the accelerator, pressbutton 1 or button 2 . The cruisingspeed is then memorised and cruisecontrol is activated The cruising



140

by the driver, without any action onthe accelerator pedal.The cruise control is switched onmanually: the vehicle speed must beat least 25 mph (40 km/h) and you

must engage at least:- 4th gear for manual gearboxes,- 2nd gear for automatic gearboxes. The programmed information is

grouped together in zone A of theinstrument panel.

Programming

Press button 4 to select cruisecontrol mode "CRUISE ".

Steering wheel switches

The cruise control switches are lo-

cated on the left-hand side of thesteering wheel.

The selection is confirmed by thedisplay of the function in zone A ofthe instrument panel.When the function is selected, nocruising speed has yet beenmemorised.

control is activated. The cruisingspeed is displayed in zone A of theinstrument panel, and "ON" is dis-played.

Adjustment of the memorisedspeed while cruise control isin operation

You can adjust the memorisedspeed, displayed in zone A , bypressing:- Button 1 to increase the speed.- Button 2 to reduce the speed.

Successive presses will modify thecruise speed in steps of 1 mph and acontinuous press in steps of 5 mph.

You can then release the accelera-tor pedal. The vehicle will automati-cally keep to the speed chosen.The vehicle speed may vary slightlyfrom that memorised.If during cruise control the systemcannot keep to the cruise speed(e.g. on a steep descent), then thespeed flashes. If necessary, brake to

curb your speed.

D R I V I N G

Overriding the programmedspeed

While cruise control is in operation,it is always possible to go above the

Reactivation

- By recalling the memorisedspeed

Aft d ti ti b tt 3

Operating fault

If there is a malfunction, a mes-sage is displayed accompanied bya sound signal and lighting of the



Cruise control must only beused where the traffic con-ditions permit driving at aconstant speed.

Do not use it on congested roadsor when the weather or the roadconditions are poor.

The driver still has to remain atten-tive and in complete control of hisvehicle.You are recommended to keep yourfeet within range of the pedals.

it is always possible to go above theprogrammed speed simply by press-ing the accelerator pedal (for exam-ple to overtake another vehicle).The speed displayed in zone A

flashes.You only have to release the ac-celerator pedal to return to the pro-grammed speed.

Suspension/Resumption

Either by pressing the brakepedal or the clutch pedal.

Or by pressing button3 . Or by the ESP or ASR systems

being active.For vehicles with a manual gearbox,cruise control is deactivated if thegear lever is in neutral.

After deactivation, press button3 .Your vehicle automatically returnsto the memorised cruising speed.The memorised speed and"ON" are displayed in zone A .

If the memorised cruising speedis higher than the current speed,the vehicle will accelerate strong-ly to reach the current speed.

- By selecting the current speed

Press button 1 or 2 once the de-sired speed has been reached.The new speed and "ON" willappear in zone A .

Return to normal driving

Press on button 5 . Select the cruise control function. Or stop the engine.The speed that was chosen is no

longer memorised.

"PAUSE" will be displayed in zoneA of the instrument panel.

These actions do not cancel thecruising speed which remains dis-played on the instrument panel.

a sound signal and lighting of theSERVICE warning lamp.Have it checked by a CITROËNdealer.

D R I V I N G

WARNING SYSTEM

System which detects the involun-tary crossing of longitudinal traffic

Activation

Press button A , the indicator lightcomes on.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction, theservice warning light comes on, ac-companied by an audible signal and a



142

tary crossing of longitudinal trafficlane markings on the ground (con-tinuous or discontinuous line).Sensors, fitted below the frontbumper, trigger a warning if the vehi-

cle drifts (speed higher than 50 mph(80 km/h)).

This system operates to its fullpotential above all when used onmotorways and main roads.

Deactivation

Press button A again, the indica-tor light switches off.

The status of the system remainsin the memory when the ignition isswitched off.

Detection

You are warned by the vibration ofthe driver's seat cushion:- on the right-hand side, if the

marking on the ground has beencrossed on the right,

- on the left-hand side, if the mark-ing on the ground has beencrossed on the left.

No warning is transmitted while thedirection indicator is active and forapproximately 20 seconds after thedirection indicator is switched off. A warning may be transmitted if adirection marking (e.g. arrow) ornon-standard marking (e.g. graffiti)is crossed.

companied by an audible signal and amessage on the multifunction display.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

The lane departure warning sys-tem cannot, in any circumstances,replace the need for vigilance andresponsibility on the part of thedriver.

The detection may be disrupted:- if the sensors are dirty (mud,

snow...),- if the markings on the ground

are worn,- if there is little contrast between

the markings on the ground andthe road surface.

D R I V I N G

PARKING SPACE SENSOR



System which measures the parkingspace available between two vehi-cles or obstacles. It measures thesize of the space and gives you in-formation on:

- the possibility of fitting into afree space, depending on thedimensions of your vehicle andthe distances necessary for yourmanoeuvring,

- the level of difficulty of the ma-noeuvre to be performed.

The system does not measure spac-es which are clearly much smaller orlarger than the size of the vehicle.

Displays on the instrumentpanel

The parking space sensor functionwarning lamp can have three differ-

ent statuses:- off: the function is not selected,- on fixed: the function is selected

but the conditions for measuringare not yet met (direction indi-cator not operating, speed toohigh) or the measuring phase isterminated.

- flashing: the measuring is inprogress or the message is be-ing displayed.

You can select the "parking spacesensor" function by pressing buttonA. The fixed lighting of the warninglamp indicates that the function isselected.

During the measurement, the mes-sage "Measurement in progress -Vmax 20 km/h (12 mph)" is displayedon the instrument panel screen.

D R I V I N G

Operation

You have identified a parkingspace: Press button A to select the function

The function displays the followingtypes of message:

The function deselects itself auto-matically:- when you engage reverse gear,- when you switch off the ignition,

if i i d



144

If there is a malfunction, have thesystem checked by a CITROËNdealer.

Press button A to select the function. Activate the direction indicator

on the side where the space is tobe measured.

During the measuring, go for-ward the length of the space, ata speed less than 12 mph (ap-prox. 20 km/h), to prepare foryour manoeuvre.

The system then measures the sizeof the space.

The system informs you of thelevel of difficulty of the manoeu-vre via a message on the instru-ment panel display accompaniedby a gong.

Depending on the message is-sued by the system, you may ormay not be able to perform the

manoeuvre.

Parking YES

Parking difficult

Parking NO

- if measuring is not requested,- within five minutes of selection of

the function,- if the vehicle speed exceeds the

threshold of 45 mph (approx.70 km/h) for one minute.

If the lateral distance between yourvehicle and the parking space is toolarge, the system may not be ablethe measure the space.The function remains available aftereach measurement and thus canmeasure more than one space dur-ing your search.In bad weather conditions or inwinter, make sure that the sensorsare not covered by dirt, or by ice orsnow.The parking space sensor functiondeactivates the front parking assist-ance during the space measuringphase when you are in forward gear.

D R I V I N G

The parking assistance systemcannot, in any circumstances, re-place the need for vigilance andresponsibility on the part of the

VISUAL AND AUDIBLEFRONT AND/OR REARPARKING ASSISTANCE

System consisting of proximity sen-

The parking assistance is switchedon :- by engaging reverse gear,- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h)

i f d



driver.System consisting of proximity sen-sors, installed in the front and/or rearbumper.It detects any obstacle (person, ve-hicle, tree, barrier...) located behind

the vehicle, however, it will not beable to detect obstacles located im-mediately below the bumper. An object, such as a stake, a road-works cone or any other similar object may be detected at the start ofthe manoeuvre but may no longerbe detected when the vehicle movesnearer to it.

in forward gear.This is accompanied by an audiblesignal and/or displaying of the vehi-cle on the multifunction display.

The proximity information is indicat-ed by:- an audible signal which be-

comes more rapid as the vehicleapproaches the obstacle,

- a diagram on the multifunctiondisplay, with blocks which movecloser to the vehicle.

The obstacle is located in relation tothe emission of the audible signal bythe speakers; front or rear and rightor left.

When the distance between the ve-hicle and the obstacle is less thanapproximately twenty-five centime-tres, the audible signal becomescontinuous and/or the "Danger"symbol appears, depending on themultifunction display version.

The parking assistance is switchedoff :- when you exit reverse gear,- when the speed is higher than

6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,- when the vehicle has been station-

ary for more than three seconds inforward gear.

Deactivation

Press button A , the warning light

comes on, the system is fully de-activated.The system will be deactivated au-tomatically when a trailer is beingtowed or when a bicycle carrier isfitted (vehicle fitted with a towbaror bicycle carrier recommended byCITROËN).

D R I V I N G

Reactivation "HYDRACTIVE III+"ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION

Display on the instrumentpanel

The suspension mode selected isdisplayed on the instrument panel



146

In bad weather or in winter, ensurethat the sensors are not coveredwith mud, ice or snow. When re-verse gear is engaged, an audiblesignal (long beep) indicates that thesensors may be dirty.

Press button A again, the warn-ing light switches off, the systemis reactivated. The suspension automatically and

instantly adjusts to different drivingstyles and to the profile of the road,providing the best compromise be-tween occupant comfort and vehicleroad holding.It allows you to alternate betweensoft and firm suspension settings,maximising comfort at the sametime as permanently guaranteeingthe highest level of safety. It alsoautomatically corrects road holding,according to the vehicle load anddriving conditions. Also, the "Hydractive III+" suspen-sion gives you the possibility of

choosing between two modes ofsuspension. A change of suspension mode canbe made either when the vehicle ismoving or when stationary, by press-ing on button A .

displayed on the instrument paneldisplay.

Normal mode

This mode favours soft damp-ing for maximum comfort.If the speed authorised for aparticular position is exceed-ed, the vehicle reverts auto-matically to the normal roadposition.

SPORT mode

This mode favours dynamicdriving.The warning lamp on but-ton A comes on in additionto the message on the in-strument panel display.

SPORT mode is retained when youswitch off the engine.

D R I V I N G

Reactivation "HYDRACTIVE III+"ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION

Display on the instrumentpanel

The suspension mode selected isdisplayed on the instrument panel



146

In bad weather or in winter, ensurethat the sensors are not coveredwith mud, ice or snow. When re-verse gear is engaged, an audiblesignal (long beep) indicates that thesensors may be dirty.

Press button A again, the warn-ing light switches off, the systemis reactivated. The suspension automatically and

instantly adjusts to different drivingstyles and to the profile of the road,providing the best compromise be-

tween occupant comfort and vehicleroad holding.

It allows you to alternate betweensoft and firm suspension settings,maximising comfort at the sametime as permanently guaranteeingthe highest level of safety. It alsoautomatically corrects road holding,according to the vehicle load anddriving conditions.

Also, the "Hydractive III+" suspen-sion gives you the possibility of

choosing between two modes ofsuspension.

A change of suspension mode canbe made either when the vehicle ismoving or when stationary, by press-ing on button A .

displayed on the instrument paneldisplay.

Normal mode

This mode favours soft damp-ing for maximum comfort.

If the speed authorised for aparticular position is exceed-ed, the vehicle reverts auto-matically to the normal roadposition.

SPORT mode

This mode favours dynamicdriving.

The warning lamp on but-ton A comes on in additionto the message on the in-strument panel display.

SPORT mode is retained when youswitch off the engine.

D R I V I N G

Vehicle positions



Maximum height

Changing a wheel (Not possible ifspeed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).

Intermediate position

For an increased ground clearance(Not possible if speed > 25 mph(40 km/h)).

For use on difficult roads when trav-elling at reduced speed, as well ason car park ramps.

Position changes may only bemade when the engine is running.

Adjustable ground clearance re-sponds to all types of situation. Apart from a few specific situations,

driving in the normal road position isimperative.

Press once on one of the adjust-ment controls.

The change in position is indicatedby a message on the instrumentpanel display.

Normal position

If the speed authorised for a particu-lar position is exceeded, the vehiclereverts automatically to the normalposition.

Minimum height

To facilitate loading or unloading thevehicle.

For workshop inspections.

Not to be used in normal driving (Notpossible if speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).

D R I V I N G

Position not authorised Automatic variation of ground clear-ance

- If your speed exceeds 70 mph(approx. 110 km/h), on a goodroad surface, ground clearance

For your safety if you are operat-ing underneath the vehicle, it isobligatory to support the vehiclewith axle stands



148

The instrument panel display tempo-rarily displays a message indicatingthat this position is not authorised.

The vehicle remains in the author-ised position and the instrumentpanel display indicates this positionto you.

road surface, ground clearanceis lowered. The vehicle returnsto its normal position if the roadsurface deteriorates or if yourspeed is lower than 55 mph (ap-

prox. 90 km/h).- At low or medium speed, if the

road surface is poor, groundclearance is increased. The ve-hicle returns to its normal posi-tion as soon as conditions allow.

- On switching off the ignition, theground clearance is reduced tothe parking position

with axle stands.

C H E C K S

BONNET

Protects the components of the engineand provides access for checkinglevels.

To avoid any risk of burns, onlyhandle the bonnet strut by its yel-low end.

The location of the interior controli f h b



150

0

Opening

Lift the leverB and raise the bonnet.

Unclip the strut C from its hous-

ing and pivot it to insert it in thenotch D indicated by a yellow ar-row.

Fix the strut in the notch to holdthe bonnet open.

Closing

Take the strut out of the supportnotch.

Clip the strut in its housing.

Lower the bonnet then slam itfirmly at the end of its travel.

Pull on the bonnet to check thatit is secured correctly.

prevents opening of the bonnetwhile the driver's door is closed.

This operation must only be carriedout when the vehicle is stationary.

Avoid opening the bonnet in strongwinds.

Open the driver's door.

Pull the interior controlA , locatedat the bottom of the door frame.

C H E C K S

DRAINING THE DIESEL FUELFILTER

Protective cover

Draining water from the fuelfilter

Refitting

Firstly clip in at 2 .

Lower and centre the cover.

Clip in at 3 and 4 , pushing verti-ll d tl f th



Removal of the cover

Drain regularly (at each oil change).

To drain the water, slacken the bleedscrew or the water in diesel fuel sen-sor, located at the base of the filter.

Continue until all the water hasflowed out.

Then retighten the bleed screw orthe water detection sensor.

HDi 110, HDi 173 and V6 HDi 208engines

Pull the protective cover upwards

to remove it.

HDi 138 engine

Remove the protective cover byfirst unclipping at 3 , then 1 and 4.

Unclip at 2 by pulling towardsyou, then lift up.

cally and gently from the rear.

Clip in at 1 pushing vertically.

C H E C K S

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL(DIESEL)

If the engine fails to start at the firstattempt, wait fifteen seconds beforetrying again.If the engine fails to start after a fewattempts, action the priming pump



152

0

HDi 110 engine

Unclip the protective coverto gain access to the primingpump.

HDi 138 and HDi 173 engines

Unclip the protective coverto gain access to the primingpump.

Priming the fuel circuit

In the event of running out of fuel: after filling (minimum 5 litres) and

removing the protective cover,action the manual priming pump,until some resistance is felt,

operate the starter motor whiledepressing the accelerator pedalslightly until the engine starts. HDi engines are the result

of advanced technology.

Any intervention requires specialqualifications which only a CITROËNdealer can guarantee.

V6 HDi 208 engine with electricpump

In the event of running out of fuel: after adding fuel, turn the ignition

key to position M , wait for a fewseconds,

operate the starter motor untilthe engine starts.If the engine fails to start after severalattempts, contact a CITROËN dealer.

p , p g p pagain and then try to start the en-gine.When the engine is idling, acceler-ate slightly to complete the bleeding

of the circuit.

C H E C K S

PETROL ENGINES

They allow you access for checkingthe level of the various fluids and forreplacing certain components.



1. Screenwash and headlampwash reservoir.

2. Power steering fluid reservoir orpower steering and suspensionfluid reservoir.

3. Coolant reservoir.

4. Dipstick.

5. Engine oil filler cap.

6. Brake fluid reservoir.

7. Battery.

8. Air filter.

Vehicles fitted with the 2.0i16V engine may be fitted

with metal suspension. Inthis case, a different power steer-ing fluid reservoir is fitted.

1.8i 16V

2.0i 16V

C H E C K S

3 litre V6 petrol engine

1. Screen wash and headlampwash reservoir.



154

0

2. Power steering and suspensionfluid reservoir.

3. Engine coolant reservoir.

4. Engine oil gauge.

5. Engine oil topping-up.


7. Battery.

8. Air filter.

3.0i V6

C H E C K S

DIESEL ENGINES

They allow you access for checkingthe level of the various fluids, for re-placing certain components and forrepriming the fuel



repriming the fuel.

1. Screenwash and headlampwash reservoir.

2. Power steering fluid reservoir orpower steering and suspensionfluid reservoir, depending onequipment.

3. Coolant reservoir.

4. Dipstick.

5. Engine oil filler cap.

6. Air filter.


8. Battery.

As the diesel circuit is pres-surised, any work on thiscircuit is prohibited.

Vehicles fitted with the HDi 138 engine may be fitted with metalsuspension. In this case, a differ-ent power steering fluid reservoir isfitted.

HDi 110

HDi 138

C H E C K S

HDi 173 - V6 HDi 208 engines(with particle filter)

1. Screen wash and headlampwash reservoir.



156

0

2. Power steering and suspensionfluid reservoir.

3. Engine coolant reservoir.

4. Engine oil gauge.

5. Engine oil topping-up.

6. Air filter.


8. Battery.

9. "+" and "-" terminals for starting

with an assisting battery.

The diesel fuel circuit beingunder high pressure:

- Any intervention on the circuitis prohibited.

- HDi engines are the result ofadvanced technology.

Any intervention requires spe-cial qualifications which only aCITROËN dealer can guarantee.

HDi 173

V6 HDi 208

C H E C K S

CHECKING LEVELS

Check all of these levels regularlyand top them up if necessary, unlessotherwise indicated.If l l d i ifi tl h th

Brake fluid level

The brake fluid level shouldbe close to the "MAX" mark.If it is not, check the brake

d

Dipstick

There are 2 marks on thedipstick:- A = max; never ex-

ceed this level,



If a level drops significantly, have thecorresponding circuit checked by aCITROËN dealer.

Oil level

Draining the engineRefer to the Maintenance andWarranty Guide for details of the in-terval for this operation.

Oil specification

The oil must correspond to your engineand conform to the manufacturer'srecommendations.

Draining the circuit

Refer to the Maintenance andWarranty Guide for details of the in-terval for this operation.This fluid must be changed regularly.Fluid which has been used exces-sively may cause a loss of brakingefficiency.

Fluid specification

The brake fluid must conform to themanufacturer's recommendations andfulfil the DOT4 standards.

The reading will only becorrect if the vehicle is onlevel ground and the enginehas been off for more than15 minutes.

The check is carried out either whenthe ignition is switched on using theoil level indicator on the instrumentpanel, or using the dipstick.

Between two oil changes, the con-sumption should not exceed 0.5 litreper 600 miles (1,000 km).Check this level also between eachscheduled service and before long journeys.

pad wear.

In order to maintain the re-liability of the engine andemission control system,

the use of additives in the engineoil is prohibited.

Power steering fluid or powersteering and suspensionfluid level

This fluid must be topped upby a CITROËN dealer.

,- B = min; top up the level

via the oil filler cap, us-ing the type of oil suitedto your engine.

C H E C K S

Screenwash and headlampwash fluid

Diesel additive level (Dieselengine with particle emissionfilter)

A low additive level is indicated bylighting of the service warning light

In the case of vehicles fittedwith headlamp washers, theminimum level of this fluid is

Coolant level

The coolant level should beclose to the "MAX" mark butshould never exceed it



158

0

Fluid specification

For optimum cleaning and to avoidfreezing, this fluid must not betopped up or replaced with water.Reservoir capacities:- screenwash: approximately 3.5 litres, - screenwash and headlamp

wash: approximately 6.15 litres.

lighting of the service warning light,accompanied by an audible warningand a message on the multifunctiondisplay.

Topping up

This additive must be topped up bya CITROËN dealer without delay.

Used products

Avoid prolonged contact ofused oil or fluids with theskin.

Most of these fluids are harmful tohealth or indeed very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil orfluids into sewers or ontothe ground.

Empty used oil into the contain-

ers provided for this purpose in theCITROËN network.

minimum level of this fluid isindicated by an audible signal

and a message on the multifunctiondisplay.

Top up the level when you stop thevehicle.

Draining the circuit

The coolant does not have to bechanged.

Fluid specification

The coolant must conform to themanufacturer's recommendations.

should never exceed it.

When the engine is warm, the tem-perature of the coolant is regulated

by the fan. This can operate with theignition off.On vehicles which are fitted witha particle emission filter, the fanmay operate after the vehicle hasbeen switched off, even if the en-gine is cold. In addition, as the cooling system ispressurised, wait at least one hourafter switching off the engine beforecarrying out any work.To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrewthe cap by two turns to allow the pres-sure to drop. When the pressure hasdropped, remove the cap and top upthe level.

C H E C K S

CHECKS

Unless otherwise indicated, checkthese components in accordancewith the Maintenance and WarrantyGuide and in relation to your en-

Air filter and passenger compartment filter

Refer to the Maintenanceand Warranty Guide fordetails of the replacementintervals for these compo-

Particulate filter system(Diesel)

Complementary to the catalyticconverter, this filter makes an ac-tive contribution to the preservation



Guide and in relation to your engine.Otherwise, have them checked by aCITROËN dealer.

Battery

The battery does not re-quire any maintenance.However, check that theterminals are clean andcorrectly tightened, particu-larly in summer and winter.

When carrying out work on the bat-tery, refer to the "Practical information"section for details of the precautions

to be taken before disconnecting thebattery and following its reconnection.

intervals for these components.

Depending on the environment (e.g.dusty atmosphere) and the use of

the vehicle (e.g. city driving),replacethem twice as often if necessary (refer to the "Engines" paragraph). A clogged passenger compartmentfilter may have an adverse effect onthe performance of the air condition-ing system and generate undesir-able odours.

Oil filter

Replace the oil filter eachtime the engine oil ischanged.

tive contribution to the preservationof air quality by the retaining of theunburnt pollutant particles. Blackexhaust fumes are thus no longeremitted. After prolonged idling or drivingat very low speeds, you may oc-casionally notice water vapour be-ing emitted from the exhaust whenaccelerating. This is of no conse-quence to the running of the vehicleor to the environment.

If there is risk of clogging, a mes-sage appears on the instrumentpanel display, accompanied by asound signal and lighting of theservice warning lamp.This alert tells you that the particlefilter is starting to fill up (in condi-tions of urban driving of excep-tionally long duration: low speeds,traffic jams etc.).

To regenerate the filter, it is advisedto drive as soon as possible, whentraffic conditions permit, at a speedof 40 mph (around 60 km/h) ormore for at least five minutes (untilthe alert message disappears).

If this alert persists, consult aCITROËN dealer.

Refer to the Maintenance andWarranty Guide for details of thereplacement interval for this compo-nent.

C H E C K S

Manual gearbox

The gearbox does not re-quire any maintenance (nooil change).

Brake disc wear status

For information relating tochecking the brake discwear status, contact aCITROËN dealer

Only use products recom-mended by CITROËN orproducts of equivalent qual-ity and specifications.

In order to optimise the operation



160

0

Brake pads

Brake wear depends onthe style of driving, par-ticularly in the case of ve-hicles used in town, overshort distances. It may be

necessary to have the condition of

the brakes checked, even betweenvehicle services.Unless there is a leak in the circuit, adrop in the brake fluid level indicatesthat the brake pads are worn.

Automatic gearbox

The gearbox does not re-quire any maintenance(no oil change).

CITROËN dealer.

Handbrake

If the handbrake travel istoo long or if a loss of ef-fectiveness of this systemis noticed, the handbrakemust be adjusted, evenbetween two services.

This system must be checked by aCITROËN dealer.

In order to optimise the operationof units as important as the brakingsystem, CITROËN selects and of-fers very specific products.

To avoid damaging the electricalunits, the use of a high pressurewasher in the engine compartmentis strictly prohibited .

Refer to the Maintenance andWarranty Guide for the details of thechecking interval for this component.

Refer to the Maintenance andWarranty Guide for details of thechecking interval for this component.

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N

PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT Using the kit

Switch off the ignition. Affix the speed limitation sticker

to the vehicle's steering wheel

Complete system consisting of acompressor and a bottle of fillingproduct which permits temporaryrepair of the tyre so that you can



The puncture repair kit is located inthe boot under the floor.

gto remind you that a wheel is intemporary use.

Check that the switch A is tiltedto position "0" .

Connect the pipe of the bottle 1 to the valve of the tyre to be re-paired.

Connect the compressor's elec-tric plug to the vehicle's 12 Vsocket.

Start the vehicle and leave theengine running.

repair of the tyre so that you candrive to the nearest garage.

This repair kit is available fromCITROËN dealers.It is designed to repair holes of amaximum diameter of 6 mm, locat-ed exclusively on the tyre tread orshoulder. Avoid removing any for-eign bodies which have penetratedthe tyre.


Switch on the compressor by tilt-ing the switch A to position "1" until the tyre pressure reaches2.0 bars.

If this pressure has notbeen reached after approxi-mately five to ten minutes,

the tyre cannot be repaired; contacta CITROËN dealer to have your ve-hi l i d



162

1

Remove the compressor andunclip and store the bottle in asealed bag to avoid staining yourvehicle with traces of fluid.

Drive immediately for approxi-mately two miles (three kilo-metres), at reduced speed(between 15 and 35 mph [20 and

60 km/h]), to fill the puncture. Stop to check the repair and thepressure.

Connect the compressor pipe di-rectly to the valve of the repairedwheel.

hicle repaired.


Connect the compressor's elec-tric plug to the vehicle's 12 Vsocket again.

Start the vehicle again and leavethe engine running.

Take care, the bottle ofpuncture repair fluid con-tains ethylene-glycol. This

product is harmful if swallowed andcauses irritation to the eyes. Keepit t f h f hild



Adjust the pressure using thecompressor (to inflate: switch A in position "1" ; to deflate: switchA in position "0" and press but-ton B ), in accordance with thevehicle's tyre pressure label (lo-cated on the door aperture on thedriver's side), then remember to

check that the leak is filled cor-rectly (no further loss of pressureafter several miles [kilometres]).

Remove the compressor, thenstore the whole kit.

Drive at reduced speed (50 mph[80 km/h] max) limiting the dis-tance travelled to approximately120 miles (200 km).

Visit a CITROËN dealer as soon aspossible to have the tyre repairedor replaced by a technician.

it out of reach of children.The expiry date of the fluid is indi-cated on the base of the bottle.The bottle is designed for a sin-gle use; even if only partly used, itmust be replaced. After use, do not discard the bot-tle into the environment, take it to aCITROËN dealer or to an organisa-tion responsible for its collection.Do not forget to obtain a new bot-tle of filling product, available fromCITROËN dealers.

If the vehicle is fitted with tyreunder-inflation detection, the tyreunder-inflation warning light willremain on after the wheel has beenrepaired until the system is reini-tialised by a CITROËN dealer.


CHANGING A WHEEL

Access to the tools



164

1

The tools are to be found in a protec-tive holder inside the spare wheel.

Pull back the retaining strap tohave access.

List of tools

1. Handle

2. Jack

3. Tool for the removal/refitting ofbolt protectors

4. Centring guide

5. Towing eye

6. Moveable chock (depending onequipment)


Access to the spare wheel



To remove the spare wheel

Lift up the boot floor using thestrap (Saloon) or the retractablehandle (Tourer).

Fold back the boot carpet

(Saloon). Attach the hook to the upper sec-

tion of the boot (in the middle ofthe boot pillar).

Detach the strap then push thewheel forwards so as to be ableto lift it.

To reposition the spare wheel

Position the spare wheel flat inthe boot, then pull it towardsyou.

Next place the toolbox inside the

wheel, then secure the assemblywith the belt.

Release the strap to return theboot floor to its initial position.

The tyre pressure is indi-cated on the label locatedon the left-hand door centre

pillar. On this label, the pressuresare specified, according to thevehicle load.


Removing a wheel Continue to extend the jack untilthe wheel is a few centimetresoff the ground.

Undo the bolts, remove thewheel.



166

Park the vehicle on stable, firmground that is not slippery. applythe parking brake.

If your vehicle is equipped with"Hydractive III+" suspension,with the engine running at idle,adjust the ground clearance toits maximum height.

Switch off the ignition and en-gage first gear or reverse geardepending on any slope (for a

vehicle with automatic gearbox,select position P ). If your vehicle is fitted with

"Hydractive III+" suspension,position the chock, whichever di-rection the gradient may be in, infront of the front wheel diametri-cally opposite to the one to bereplaced.

Position the jack at one of thefour jacking-points providedon the subframe close to thewheels, then use the handle tounwind the jack until it reachesthe ground.

Remove the protector from eachbolt using tool 3 .

Slacken the wheel bolts.

Before positioning the jack:

Always adjust the vehicle’sground clearance to the "maxi-mum height" position and re-tain this adjustment for as longas the jack is under the vehicle(do not use the hydraulic adjustments),

Immobilise your vehicle on hor-izontal, stable and non-slipperyground,

Ensure that any passengershave left the vehicle and are ina safe place.

Never get underneath the vehicle ifit is supported only by the jack.The jack and all of the tools arespecific to your vehicle. Do not usethem for any other applications.Have the original wheel repairedand refitted as soon as possible.


Wheel for temporary use Fitting a wheel

Fit the wheel on the hub, usingthe centring guide. Make surethat the contact surface betweenthe hub and the wheel is clean.

If your vehicle is fitted witha spare wheel of a differentsize to those on the vehi-

cle, you must not exceed 50 mph(80 km/h) whilst using the sparewheel



Your vehicle may be fitted with aspare wheel which is different tothose on the vehicle. When fittingthe spare wheel, it is normal to no-tice that the wheel bolt washers donot come into contact with the wheelrim. The spare wheel is secured bythe conical tapering of the wheelbolt’s shaft.

When refitting the original wheel,ensure that the wheel bolt contactsurfaces are clean and in good con-dition.

Screw in the bolts but do not fullytighten them.

Lower the jack and remove it.

Tighten the wheel bolts, usingthe wheelbrace. Refit the protectors on the bolts. Return the ground clearance to

the normal position. Ensure the tyre pressure is cor-

rect and have the balancingchecked.

Deflation detection

Such wheels have tyre pressure sen-sors. It is essential to have repairscarried out by a CITROËN dealer.

Anti-theft bolts

Each wheel is equipped with oneanti-theft bolt.To remove it: Remove the protector using tool3 . Use the anti-theft socket with the

handle.

wheel.The wheel bolts are specific to thetype of wheel.If the type of wheel is changed,check with your CITROËN dealerthat the wheel bolts are compatiblewith the new wheels.Take care to note down the codenumber engraved on the head ofthe anti-theft bolt socket. This willenable you to obtain replacementanti-theft bolt sockets from a deal-ership.


Wheel for temporary use Fitting a wheel

Fit the wheel on the hub, usingthe centring guide. Make surethat the contact surface betweenthe hub and the wheel is clean.

If your vehicle is fitted witha spare wheel of a differentsize to those on the vehi-

cle, you must not exceed 50 mph(80 km/h) whilst using the sparewheel



Your vehicle may be fitted with aspare wheel which is different tothose on the vehicle. When fittingthe spare wheel, it is normal to no-tice that the wheel bolt washers donot come into contact with the wheelrim. The spare wheel is secured bythe conical tapering of the wheelbolt’s shaft.

When refitting the original wheel,ensure that the wheel bolt contactsurfaces are clean and in good con-dition.

Screw in the bolts but do not fullytighten them.

Lower the jack and remove it.

Tighten the wheel bolts, usingthe wheelbrace. Refit the protectors on the bolts. Return the ground clearance to

the normal position. Ensure the tyre pressure is cor-

rect and have the balancingchecked.

Deflation detection

Such wheels have tyre pressure sen-sors. It is essential to have repairscarried out by a CITROËN dealer.

Anti-theft bolts

Each wheel is equipped with oneanti-theft bolt.To remove it: Remove the protector using tool3 . Use the anti-theft socket with the

handle.

wheel.The wheel bolts are specific to thetype of wheel.If the type of wheel is changed,check with your CITROËN dealerthat the wheel bolts are compatiblewith the new wheels.Take care to note down the codenumber engraved on the head ofthe anti-theft bolt socket. This willenable you to obtain replacementanti-theft bolt sockets from a deal-ership.


CHANGING A BULB

Operating procedure for replacing afaulty bulb with a new bulb withoutthe use of any tools.

Changing sidelamps



168

Headlamps

Model with Xenon headlamps (D1S)

1. Sidelamps: W 5 W2. Dual-function Xenon

headlamps (dipped/main): D1S

3. Angular lighting: HP19

4. Daytime-running lamps: HP24

Lift up the pegs A to remove thecover on the headlamp.

Remove the protective capB . Pull the bulb holder to remove it.

Replace the bulb and replacethe bulb holder.

For the maintenance of the front

headlamp unit and the changing ofHP19, D1S and HP21 bulbs, contacta CITROËN dealer.

Risk of electrocution

Xenon bulbs must be re-placed by a CITROËNdealer.

You are advised to change theD1S bulbs at the same time,if one of them has failed.

Replace the protective cap B . Replace the cover and fix it in

place using the pegs A .


Changing main beams Changing sidelampsModel with halogen headlamps




Remove the protective capB . Disengage the retaining spring.

Remove the bulb and replace it,paying attention to the directionof fitting.

Replace the retaining spring. Replace the protective cap B . Replace the cover and fix it in



Remove the protective capB . Pull the bulb holder to remove it.

Replace the bulb and replacethe bulb holder. Replace the protective cap B . Replace the cover and fix it in


1. Main beams: H1

2. Sidelamps: W 5 W3. Dipped beams: H7

4. Directional lighting: H7

5. Daytime-running lamps: HP24

For the maintenance of the frontheadlamp unit and the changing ofHP24 bulbs, contact a CITROËNdealer.

Halogen bulbs must not be changeduntil they have been off for a fewminutes (risk of serious burns).Do not touch the bulb directly withyour fingers, use a lint-free cloth.

It is essential that only anti-U.V.type bulbs are used in order not todamage the headlamp.


Changing dipped beams Changing the directional lighting Changing direction indicators



170

1


Remove the protective capC . Disconnect the connector by

pressing it between the thumband index finger. Free the bulb from its two metal

clamps. Take out the bulb. Replace the bulb, exerting a

slight axial force. Reconnect the connector, until it

is all the way in. Replace the protective cap C . Replace the cover and fix it in



Remove the protective capD . Disconnect the connector by

pressing it between the thumband index finger. Free the bulb from its two metal

clamps. Take out the bulb. Replace the bulb, exerting a

slight axial force. Reconnect the connector, until it

is all the way in. Replace the protective cap D . Replace the cover and fix it in


Remove the fixing screw of coverA using a torx tool, tip the coverover and remove.

Remove the fixing screw of lampB using a torx tool and pull theheadlamp unit to remove it fromthe bumper.

Detach the bulb C by pressing

on bars 1 and 2 . Disconnect the connector (pull

whilst pressing on the greytongue using a flat screwdriver).

Replace the bulb. Connect the connector (push the

grey tongue in well). Replace the headlamp unit in the

bumper. Screw the headlamp unit in. Position the cover using its

guides and screw in.Bulbs: HP24 W


Changing front foglamps Changing side repeaters



Remove the fixing screw of coverA using a torx tool, tip the coverover and remove.

Remove the fixing screw oflamp B using a torx tool and pullthe headlamp unit to remove itfrom the bumper.

The side repeater is sealed.If the bulb is faulty, replace the siderepeater.Consult a CITROËN dealer.

Disconnect the connector D . Remove the bulb by performing

a quarter of a turn. Replace the bulb. Connect the connector D . Replace the headlamp unit in the

bumper. Screw the headlamp unit in. Position the cover using its

guides and screw in.Bulbs: H8

When refitting, take care not totrap the electrical cables.


Rear lamps (Saloon) Changing the lamps on the boot



172

Identify the failed bulb.1. Stop-lamps and sidelamps:

P21 W/5 W2. Sidelamps: R 5 W3. Reversing lamp: H21 W

4. Foglamps: H21 W5. Direction indicators: P21 W

Open the boot. Using a flat screwdriver, remove

the 3 clips which fix the trim inthe lamp area.

Partially remove the trim F . Disconnect the connector G .

Detach the bulb holder H . Replace the bulb. Replace the bulb holder H . Connect the connector G . Replace and fix the trimF with its

clips.

In some climatic conditions,mist may appear on theheadlamp/indicator lenses.

This is normal and will disappear(e.g. after the lamps have been onfor a few minutes).If it does not, contact a CITROËN

dealer.


Changing the lamps on the wing



Remove the lateral boot trim flapA . To do so, pull it towards theinside of the boot, then pull it up-wards.

Disconnect connector B . Unscrew the 2 fixingsC . Remove the lamp from its housing.

Detach the bulb holder D . Replace the bulb. Replace the bulb holder D . Place the lamp in its housing. Screw in the 2 fixings C . Connect connector B . Refit the trim A .

You can use the spare wheel jackhandle to screw or unscrew the fix-ings C .


Changing the lamps on the bootRear lamps (Tourer)



174

1

Open the boot. Using a flat screwdriver, remove

the 3 clips which fix the trim inthe lamp area.

Partially remove the trim F . Disconnect the connector G .

Identify the failed bulb.1. Stop-lamps and sidelamps:

P21 W/5 W2. Sidelamps: R 5 W3. Reversing lamp: H21 W4. Foglamps: H21 W

5. Direction indicators: P21 W

In some climatic conditions, mistmay appear on the headlamp/in-dicator lenses. This is normal andwill disappear(e.g. after the lamps

have been on for a few minutes).Ifit does not, contact a CITROËNdealer.

Detach the bulb holder H . Replace the bulb. Replace the bulb holder H . Connect the connector G . Replace and fix the trimF with its

clips.


Changing the lamps on the wing



Remove the lateral boot trim A .To do so: Pull it towards towards the inside

of the boot. Pull it upwards.

Disconnect the connector B . Unscrew the fixing screwC . Remove the lamp from its housing.

Detach the bulb holder D . Replace the faulty bulb. Replace the bulb holder D . Place the lamp in its housing. Screw in the fixing screw C . Connect the connector B . Refit the trim A .You can use the spare wheel jackhandle to screw or unscrew the fix-ing screw C .


Changing number plate lights(W 5 W)

Changing the third brake light(diodes)



176

1 Insert a thin screwdriver into oneof the external holes of the lens.

Push it outwards to unclip it.

For the replacement of this type ofdiode light, contact a CITROËNdealer.

Remove the lens. Change the faulty bulb.


Changing interior bulbs Boot lamp Floor lighting



Interior lamps

Unclip the transparent cover of theinterior lamp to reach the bulb.

Bulb: W 5 W

Rear reading lamps (Tourer)

Detach the cover of the readinglamp to access the bulb.

Bulb: W 5 W

Spotlamp

Detach the cover. If necessary, detach the partition

of the affected spotlamp.

Detach the cover and use a W 5 Wbulb.

Pavement lighting

Detach the cover and use aW 5 W bulb.


Glovebox



Changing interior bulbs Boot lamp Floor lighting



Interior lamps

Unclip the transparent cover of theinterior lamp to reach the bulb.

Bulb: W 5 W

Rear reading lamps (Tourer)

Detach the cover of the readinglamp to access the bulb.

Bulb: W 5 W

Spotlamp

Detach the cover.

If necessary, detach the partition

of the affected spotlamp.

Detach the cover and use a W 5 Wbulb.

Pavement lighting



Glovebox



CHANGING A FUSE

Operating procedure for replacing afaulty fuse with a new fuse to rectify afailure of the corresponding function.

The 2 fuseboxes are located below

Fuses under the dashboard

Access to the fuses

open the storage box to its stop-ping point then pull firmly on ithorizontally,

When refitting the storage box, ob-serve the following advice:

- With the storage box horizontal,refit the bottom ensuring that the



178

1

the dashboard and under the bonnet.

Replacing a fuse

Before replacing a fuse, you shouldascertain the cause of the fault andhave it remedied. The numbers ofthe fuses are indicated on the fuse-box.

Replace the fuse that has blownwith one of the same rating (samecolour).

Use the special pliers 1 placed onthe flap close to the fuseboxes. The

flap also has spare fuses available.

Good Bad

Pliers 1

y

remove the trim by pulling sharp-ly on the bottom.

Fusebox C

Fusebox A

Replacementfuses and

pliers 1

lower cut-outs are in line with thepins.

- Give a sharp push to the front.

- Close the storage box, ensuringthat the springs located behindpass over the top.

Fusebox B


CHANGING A FUSE

Operating procedure for replacing afaulty fuse with a new fuse to rectify afailure of the corresponding function.

The 2 fuseboxes are located below

Fuses under the dashboard

Access to the fuses

open the storage box to its stop-ping point then pull firmly on ithorizontally,

When refitting the storage box, ob-serve the following advice:

- With the storage box horizontal,refit the bottom ensuring that the



178

1

the dashboard and under the bonnet.

Replacing a fuse

Before replacing a fuse, you shouldascertain the cause of the fault andhave it remedied. The numbers ofthe fuses are indicated on the fuse-box.

Replace the fuse that has blownwith one of the same rating (samecolour).

Use the special pliers 1 placed onthe flap close to the fuseboxes. The

flap also has spare fuses available.

Good Bad

Pliers 1

y

remove the trim by pulling sharp-ly on the bottom.

Fusebox C

Fusebox A

Replacementfuses and

pliers 1

lower cut-outs are in line with thepins.

- Give a sharp push to the front.

- Close the storage box, ensuringthat the springs located behindpass over the top.

Fusebox B


FUSEBOX A Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

G29 - -

G30 5 A Heated rear view mirrors



G31 5 A Rain and brightness sensor

G32 5 A Seat belt not fastened warning lamps

G33 5 A Electrochrome rear view mirrors

G34 20 A Sunroof (saloon)

G35 5 A Passenger door lighting - passenger rear view mirror adjustment

G36 30 A Electric tailgate (Tourer)

G37 20 A Heated front seats

G38 30 A Driver’s electric seat

G39 30 A Passenger’s electric seat - HIFI amplifier

G40 3 A Trailer relay unit supply

FUSEBOX B


G36 15 A 6 speed automatic gearbox

5 A 4 speed automatic gearbox

G37 10 A Daytime-running lamps - Diagnostic socket

G38 3 A ESP

G39 10 A Hydraulic suspension

G40 3 A STOP switch


FUSEBOX C


F1 15 A Rear screen wipe (Tourer)

F2 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay



180

1

F3 5 A Airbags

F4 10 A Automatic gearbox - additional heater unit (Diesel) - electrochrome rear view mirrors

F5 30 A Front window - sun roof - passenger door lighting - passenger rear view mirror adjustment

F6 30 A Rear window

F7 5 A Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - interior lamps - torch (Tourer)

F8 20 A Radio - CD changer - Controls at the steering wheel - Display - Deflation detection - Electricboot ECU

F9 30 A Cigar-lighter - front 12 V socket

F10 15 A Alarm - Controls on the steering wheel, signalling and screen wipe controls

F11 15 A Low current anti-theft switch

F12 15 A Driver’s electric seat - instrument panel - seat belt not fastened warning lamps -air conditioningcontrols

F13 5 A Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay - airbag ECU supply

F14 15 A Rain and brightness sensor - parking assistance - passenger’s electric seat - trailer relay

unit - HIFI amplifier ECU - Hands-free kit - Lane Departure Warning System

F15 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay

F17 40 A Heated rear screen - exterior heated rear view mirrors

FSH SHUNT PARK SHUNT


Fuses under the bonnet Table of fuses


F1 20 A Engine control unit

F2 15 A Horn



After a repair, take care to re-

close the cover. Any repairs on the MAXI fuses(that give additional protection),located in the fuseboxes, mustbe left to a CITROËN dealer.

Access to the fuses

Undo each screw by a 1/4 turn.

F3 10 A Screen wash pump

F4 10 A Headlamp wash pump

F5 15 A Starter

F6 10 A Air flow meter - Directional headlamps -Diagnostic socket

F7 10 A Automatic gearbox lever lock - Power steering

F8 25 A Starter

F9 10 A Clutch switch - Stop switch

F10 30 A Starter

F11 40 A Air conditioning blower

F12 30 A Wipers

F13 40 A BSI supply (ignition on)

F14 30 A -

F15 10 A Right-hand main beam

F16 10 A Left-hand main beam

F17 15 A Right-hand dipped beam

F18 15 A Left-hand dipped beam

F19 15 A Starter

F20 10 A Starter

F21 5 A Starter


Fuses on the battery(All engines except V6 HDi)


F6 25 A Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W)

F7 15 A Foglamps

Table of fuses



182

g p

F8 20 A Additional burner (Diesel)

F9 30 A Electric parking brake

Access to the fuses

detach and remove the cover, change the fuse.

Your vehicle’s electricalsystem is designed to oper-ate with either standard oroptional equipment.

Before installing electrical equip-ment or accessories on your vehi-cle, consult a CITROËN dealer.CITROËN declines all responsibil-ity for the consequences and costs

that are caused by faults or repairson your vehicle resulting from the in-stallation of accessories that are notsupplied and/or not recommendedby CITROËN and not installed inconformity with its requirements,particularly when the total consump-tion of additional devices exceeds10 milliamperes.The Maxi fuses give additional pro-tection to electrical systems. anywork on them must be carried outby a CITROËN dealer.

After a repair, take care to re-close the cover.

If the cover is not correctly po-sitioned or not properly closed,

this could cause serious prob-lems on your vehicle. For thesame reason, take care not tospill any liquid in the fusebox.


Procedure for charging your batterywhen it is flat or for starting the en-gine using another battery.

Starting using anotherbattery

V6 HDi engine



Access to the battery

The battery is located under thebonnet.To gain access to it: open the bonnet using the inte-

rior lever, then the exterior lever, secure the bonnet strut, remove the plastic cover to gain

access to the two terminals, unclip the fuse box to remove

the battery, if necessary.

The battery is located in the boot un-der the left-hand wing trim.To gain access to it: open the boot, open the flap and remove the

battery.

Lift the pins to remove the frontleft headlamp cover (V6 HDi en-gine).

Connect the red cable to the posi-tive terminal (+) of the flat bat-tery A , then to the positive terminal(+) of the slave batteryB .

Connect one end of the green orblack cable to the negative ter-minal (-) of the slave battery B .V6 HDi engine: The negative ter-minal (-) is located under the redcover.

Connect the other end of thegreen or black cable to the earthpoint C on the broken down ve-hicle.

Operate the starter, let the en-gine run.

Wait until the engine returns toidle and disconnect the cables.


Charging the battery using abattery charger

Disconnect the battery from thevehicle.

Follow the instructions for useprovided by the manufacturer of

Do not disconnect the ter-minals while the engine isrunning.

Do not charge the batteries withoutdisconnecting the terminals first.Do not touch the clips during the

ti

Following reconnection of the battery

Following reconnection of the bat-tery, switch on the ignition and wait1 minute before starting to permit in-itialisation of the electronic systems.However if slight difficulties are en



184

ythe charger.

Reconnect starting with the neg-ative terminal (-).

Check that the terminals andconnectors are clean. If they arecovered with sulphate (whitish orgreenish deposit), remove themand clean them.

The batteries contain harm-ful substances such as sul-phuric acid and lead. They

must be disposed of in accordancewith regulations and must not, in

any circumstances, be discardedwith household waste.Take used remote control batteriesand vehicle batteries to a specialcollection point.

It is advisable to disconnect thebattery if the vehicle is to be left un-used for more than one month.

operation.Do not lean over the batteries.

Disconnect the cables in the re-verse order to connection, ensur-ing that they do not touch.

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching offthe ignition before disconnectingthe battery.Close the windows and the doorsbefore disconnecting the battery.

However, if slight difficulties are en-countered following this operation,contact a CITROËN dealer.

Referring to the corresponding sec-tion, you must yourself reinitialise:- the remote control key,- the glass panoramic roof shutter,- the GPS satellite navigation

system.


ENERGY ECONOMY MODE

System which manages the durationof use of certain functions to con-serve a sufficient level of charge inthe battery.

After the engine has stopped, you cantill f ti h th di

Exiting economy mode

These functions are reactivated au-tomatically next time the vehicle isdriven.

In order to resume the use ofthese functions immediately,t t th i d l t it f



still use functions such as the audioand telematics system, windscreenwipers, dipped headlamps, courtesy

lights, etc. for a maximum combinedduration of thirty minutes.

Switching to economy mode

Once the thirty minutes are over, amessage appears on the multi-functiondisplay indicating that the vehicle hasswitched to economy mode and theactive functions are put on standby.

If the telephone is being used at thistime:

- it will be maintained for 5 minuteswith radio-CD hands-free kit,

- it will be interrupted after 10 minuteswith the MyWay audio-navigationsystem,

- you can complete your call with theNaviDrive system.

This period may be significantlyreduced if the battery charge is low.

start the engine and let it run fora few minutes.

The time available will then be dou-ble the duration for which the enginewas left running. However, this timewill always be between five and thir-ty minutes.

A flat battery prevents theengine from starting (referto the corresponding para-graph).


TOWING THE VEHICLE

Procedure for having your vehicletowed or for towing another vehicleusing a removable towing eye.

Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle



186

Access to the tools

The towing eye is installed in the jack box placed in the spare wheel.

To gain access to it:

open the boot,

raise the floor,

remove the towing eye from the jack box.

On the front bumper, unclip thecover by pressing at the top.

Screw the towing eye in fully.

Install the towbar.

Switch on the hazard warninglights on the towed vehicle.

Place the gear lever in neutral(position N on the automaticgearbox).

On the rear bumper, unclip thecover by pressing:

- on the right (Saloon),

- at the bottom (Tourer).

Screw the towing eye in fully. Install the towbar.

Switch on the hazard warninglights on the towed vehicle.

Failure to observe this special con-dition could result in damage tocertain braking components andthe absence of braking assistancethe next time the engine is started.

When towing with all four wheels onthe ground, always use a towbar.

When towing with only two wheelson the ground, always use profes-sional lifting equipment.

When towing with the engine off,there is no longer any braking orsteering assistance.


TOWING A TRAILER, ACARAVAN, ETC.

Towbar suited to the attachment of atrailer or caravan with additional sig-nalling and lighting.

If the trailer is not fitted bya CITROËN dealer, it isimperative that it is fitted

using the electrical pre-equipmentinstalled at the rear of the vehicle,in accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.

Cooling

Towing a trailer on a slope increasesthe temperature of the coolant. As the fan is electrically controlled,its cooling capacity is not dependenton the engine speed. To lower the engine speed re-



Your vehicle is primarily designedfor transporting people and luggage,but it may also be used for towing atrailer.We recommend the use of originalCITROËN towbars and their har-nesses that have been tested andapproved from the design stageof your vehicle, and that the fit-ting of the towbar is entrusted to aCITROËN dealer.

Driving with a trailer subjects thetowing vehicle to more significant

stress and its driver must be par-ticularly careful.

Driving advice

Distribution of loads

Distribute the load in the trailerso that the heaviest items are asclose as possible to the axle andthe nose weight approaches themaximum permitted without ex-ceeding it.

Air density decreases with altitude,thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres, the maximumtowing load must be reduced by10 % and so on for every 1 000 me-tres of altitude.Refer to the "Technical Data" sectionfor details of the weights and towingloads which apply to your vehicle.

Side wind

Take into account the increasedsensitivity to side wind.

To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.

The maximum towing load on a long

slope depends on the gradient andthe outside temperature.In all cases, pay attention to thecoolant temperature.

If the warning light andthe STOP warning lightcome on, stop the vehicleand switch off the engineas soon as possible.

BrakingTowing a trailer increases the brak-ing distance.

Tyres

Check the tyre pressures of thetowing vehicle and of the trailer,observing the recommendedpressures.

Lights

Check the electrical signalling onthe trailer.

The rear parking assistance willbe deactivated automatically if anoriginal CITROËN towbar is used.


ROOF BARS

The design of your vehicle, for yoursafety and to avoid damage to theroof and tailgate, requires the useof roof bars that are tested and ap-proved by CITROËN.R dl f th t f l di

Recommendations

Distribute your load evenly,avoiding overloading on oneside.

Arrange the heaviest part of theload as close as possible to theroof

Maximum load that can bedistributed on the roof bars(for a loading height not

exceeding 40 cm; except bicyclecarrier): 80 kg.If the height exceeds 40 cm, adaptyour speed to the profile of the road



188

1

Regardless of the type of loadingequipment to be transported on theroof (bicycle carrier, ski carrier...),

it is imperative that you add trans-verse roof bars.

roof. Anchor the load securely and

draw attention to it if any part of

it is overhanging. Drive gently, as the vehicle will

be more liable to the effects ofside winds (vehicle stability maybe altered).

Remove the roof bars as soonas they are no longer needed.

your speed to the profile of the roadto avoid damaging the roof barsand the fixings on the roof.

Please refer to national legislationin order to comply with the regula-tions concerning the transportationof objects which are longer thanthe vehicle.


VERY COLD PROTECTION*

Moveable device which prevents theintake of snow particles, which couldobstruct the air filter.



Diesel engine HDi 173 FAP

Normal situation

The shutter 2 is in a horizontal posi-tion in the air duct 3 .

Snow situation

Push and rotate the knob 1 by90 ° in the direction of the arrowin order to position the shutter 2 in a vertical position in the airduct 3 .

To return to the normal situation,push the knob 1 then rotate in theopposite direction.

It is essential to remove the very coldprotection:

- When the outside temperatureexceeds 10 °C.

When driving at speeds of over 75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).

Diesel engine V6 HDi 208FAPSnow situation

Slide the deflector 1 into the air duct 2 and clip in.



SNOW GUARD*

Moveable device which prevents theaccumulation of snow by the radia-tor cooling fan.



190

1


Fitting

Bring the 2 sections of the snowguard up to the upper and lowersections of the front bumper.

Press on the surround to clip inone by one the fixing clips.

Remove

Using a screwdriver, lift it up todetach each fixing clip one by

one.

Before fitting After fitting

It is essential to remove the snow guard:

- When the outside temperatureexceeds 10 °C,

- When towing,

- When driving at speeds of over 75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).


"Personalisation": seat covers,alloy wheels, wheel trims, mudflaps...

"Accessories": windscreen washfluid interior and exterior cleaning



* To avoid any risk of jamming of the

pedals:- ensure that the mat is positioned

and secured correctly,- never fit one mat on top of ano-

ther.

The fitting of electricalequipment or accessorieswhich are not recommend-

ed by CITROËN may result in afailure of your vehicle's electronicsystem and excess consumption.Please note this specific warn-ing. You are advised to contact aCITROËN representative to beshown the range of recommendedequipment and accessories.

A wide range of accessories andoriginal parts is offered by theCITROËN network.These accessories and parts havebeen tested and approved for reli-ability and safety.They are all adapted to your vehicleand benefit from CITROËN's recom-mendation and warranty.

This product range is structuredaround 5 categories:

"Comfort and leisure": mats*, boottray, boot carpet, sun blinds, mini-bar, fragrance cartridges, roof bars,bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof box-es, towbars, child seats and boostercushions...

"Protection":anti-theft alarm, wheelanti-theft devices, stolen vehicletracking system, breathalyser, firstaid kit, warning triangle, high visi-bility safety jacket, dog guard, snowchains, non-skid covers, fog lampskit, puncture repair kit, rear parkingassistance...

"Navigation and communication":

Bluetooth®

hands-free kit, audioequipment, portable satellite naviga-tion system, DVD player, auxiliarycable for connecting a portable MP3player, USB Box, speakers...

fluid, interior and exterior cleaningand maintenance products, body-work touch-up aerosol and pen...

Depending on the country in whichthe vehicle is sold, it may be com-pulsory to have a high visibility safe-ty jacket, warning triangle and sparebulbs available in the vehicle.

T E C H N I C A L D A TA

MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Model codes:

RD... RW... 6FYC RFJC RFJF RFJC/FF XFVJ

PETROL ENGINES 1.8 l. 16V127 bhp

2 l. 16V 143 bhp Bioflex 2 l.

16V 143 bhp3 l. V6 24V

215 bhp



192

2

127 bhp 16V 143 bhp 215 bhp

Cubic capacity (cm3 ) 1 749 1 997 1 997 2 946

Bore x stroke (mm) 82.7 x 81.4 85 x 88 85 x 88 87 x 82.6

EU standard maximum power (kW) 92 103 103 155

Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000 6 000 6 000

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 170 200 200 290

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 3 750 4 000 4 000 3 750

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded/E85 Unleaded

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes

GEARBOXES Manual

(5-speed)

Manual

(5-speed)

Auto.

(4-speed)

Manual

(5-speed)

Auto.

(6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with cartridge replacement) 5 5 5 - 4.75

Gearbox - Final drive - - - - -


MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Model codes:RD... RW....

9HZC 9HZC/1

RHF8 RHRJ 4HTH UHZJ

DIESEL ENGINES 1.6 l. HDi 110 bhp 2 l. HDi140 bhp

2 l. HDi138 bhp

2 l. HDi 173 bhp V6 HDi 208 bhp



Cubic capacity (cm3 ) 1 560 1 997 2 179 2 720

Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 85 x 88 85 x 96 81 x 88

EU standard maximum power (kW) 80 103 100 125 150

Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 4 000 4 000 4 000

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 240 320 370 440

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 2 000 1 500 1 900

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes

Particle emission filter (PEF) Yes Yes Yes Yes

GEARBOXES Manual

(5-speed)Manual

(6-speed)

Auto.

(6-speed)

Manual

(6-speed)

Auto.

(6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with cartridge replacement) 3.75 5.25 5.25 5.5

Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 - - - -


CONSUMPTION (SALOON) In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE

Petrolengines

Gearboxes Model codes:

RD...

Urban driving(litres/100 km)

Inter-urbandriving

(litres/100 km)

Mixed driving(litres/100 km)

Emission ofCO

2 by weight(g/km)



* Unleaded.

** E85.

1.8 l. 16V127 bhp Manual 6FYC 10.8 6.2 7.9 188

2 l. 16V143 bhp

Manual RFJC 12 6.3 8.4 198

Auto. RFJF 12.7 6.7 8.9 212

Bioflex 2 l.16V 143 bhp

Manual RFJC/FF 12* 6.3* 8.4* 198*

15.5** 9.1** 11.4** 189**

3 l. V6 24V215 bhp

Auto. XFVJ 15.6 7.5 10.5 248

The consumption figures shown here correspond to the values communicated at the time of printing.

These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending onthe style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and theuse of equipment.

Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines

The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E5 type petrol biofuels (containing 5 % ethanol), conforming to Europeanstandard EN 228.

E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type offuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15376.

For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol (type E100).


CONSUMPTION (TOURER) In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE

Petrolengines


RW... Urban driving(litres/100 km)

Inter-urbandriving

(litres/100 km)


Emission ofCO

2 by weight(g/km)



194

2

1.8 l. 16V127 bhp Manual 6FYC 11.1 6.3 8.1 192

2 l. 16V143 bhp

Manual RFJC 12.1 6.4 8.5 200

Auto. RFJF 12.8 6.8 9 214

Bioflex 2 l.16V 143 bhp

Manual RFJC/FF 12.1* 6.4* 8.5* 200*

15.6** 9.2** 11.5** 191**

3 l. V6 24V215 bhp

Auto. XFVJ 15.7 7.6 10.6 250


These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending onthe style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and theuse of equipment.

* Unleaded.

** E85.


CONSUMPTION (SALOON) In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE

Dieselengines


RD... Urban driving(litres/100 km)

Inter-urbandriving

(litres/100 km)

Mixed driving

(litres/100 km)

Emission ofCO

2 by weight(g/km)



198

2

1.6 l. HDi

110 bhpAirdream Manual 9HZC/1 6.6 4.6 5.3 140

1.6 l. HDi110 bhp

Manual 9HZC 7.3 4.7 5.6 149

2 l. HDi140 bhp

Manual RHF8 7.5 4.8 5.8 153

2 l. HDi138 bhp

Auto. RHRJ 9.9 5.5 7.1 189

2 l. HDi173 bhp

Manual 4HTH 8.8 5.2 6.5 172

V6 HDi208 bhp

Auto. UHZJ 11.8 6.4 8.4 223


These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending onthe style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and theuse of accessories.

Quality of the fuel used for Diesel engines

The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards (dieselfuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) which can bedistributed at the pumps (possible incorporation of 0 to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (vegetable or animal oils, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage tothe engine and fuel circuit).


CONSUMPTION (TOURER) In accordance with directive 80/1268/CEE

Dieselengines


RW... Urban driving(litres/100 km)

Inter-urbandriving

(litres/100 km)


Emission ofCO

2 by weight(g/km)



1.6 l. HDi

110 bhpAirdream Manual 9HZC/1 6.6 4.6 5.3 140

1.6 l. HDi110 bhp

Manual 9HZC 7.4 4.8 5.7 150

2 l. HDi140 bhp

Manual RHF8 7.6 4.9 5.9 155

2 l. HDi138 bhp

Auto. RHRJ 10 5.6 7.2 191

2 l. HDi173 bhp

Manual 4HTH 8.9 5.3 6.6 175

V6 HDi208 bhp

Auto. UHZJ 11.9 6.5 8.5 225


These consumption values were established in accordance with Directive 80/1268/CEE. They may vary depending onthe style of driving, traffic conditions, weather conditions, the load in the vehicle, the maintenance of the vehicle and theuse of accessories.


WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

Petrol engines 1.8 l. 16V127 bhp


16V 143 bhp 3 l. V6 24V

215 bhp

Gearboxes Manual Manual Auto. Manual Auto.

Model codes:6FYC RFJC RFJF RFJC/FF XFVJ



The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reducedby the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

Model codes:

RD.... 6FYC RFJC RFJF RFJC/FF XFVJ

- Unladen weight 1 510 1 521 1 583 1 521 1 725

- Kerb weight 1 585 1 596 1 658 1 596 1 800

- Payload 505 542 507 542 505

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 015 2 063 2 090 2 063 2 230

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 315 3 563 3 590 3 563 3 630

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 500 1 500 1 400

- Braked trailer* (with loadtransfer within GTW limit)

1 530 1 720 1 720 1 650

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 62 69 69 66

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentionedmust be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in yourcountry).High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; whenthe exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.


WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

Petrol engines 1.8 l. 16V127 bhp


16V 143 bhp 3 l. V6 24V

215 bhp


Model codes:6FYC RFJC RFJF RFJC/FF XFVJ



196

2

RW... 6FYC RFJC RFJF RFJC/FF XFVJ

- Unladen weight 1 549 1 578 1 619 1 578 1 761

- Kerb weight 1 624 1 653 1 694 1 653 1 836

- Payload 605 605 605 605 605




on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 500 1 500 1300


1 600 1 790 1 800 1 790 1 600

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 64 72 72 68

The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentionedmust be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in yourcountry).High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; whenthe exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reducedby the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.


WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

Diesel engines 1.6 l. HDi110 bhp

2 l. HDi140 bhp

2 l. HDi138 bhp

2 l. HDi173 bhp

V6 HDi208 bhp


Model codes: 9HZC RHF8 RHRJ 4HTH UHZJ



200

2

RD... 9HZC/1 RHF8 RHRJ 4HTH UHZJ

- Unladen weight 1 503 1 608 1 658 1 729 1 766

- Kerb weight 1 578 1 683 1 733 1 804 1 841

- Payload 537 547 532 487 544




on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 100 1 600 1 300 1 600 1 400


1 370 1 820 1 560 1 820 1 690

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 55 73 63 73 68

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicleis reduced by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on itsroad holding.


WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

Diesel engines 1.6 l. HDi110 bhp

2 l. HDi140 bhp

2 l. HDi138 bhp

2 l. HDi173 bhp

V6 HDi208 bhp


Model codes: 9HZC RHF8 RHRJ 4HTH UHZJ



The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentionedmust be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in yourcountry).

High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; whenthe exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

RW... 9HZC/1 RHF8 RHRJ 4HTH UHZJ

- Unladen weight 1 537 1 655 1 695 1 765 1 802

- Kerb weight 1 612 1 730 1 770 1 840 1 877

- Payload 641 621 631 587 571




on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 000 1 500 1 200 1 600 1 300


1 300 1 800 1 500 1 900 1 600

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 52 72 60 77 64


DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

Exterior (Saloon)

A 2 815

B 1 054



202

2

* Without roof bars.

C 910

D 4 779

E 1 586

F 2 096

G 1 557

H 1 860

I * 1 451


Interior (Saloon)

A 1 030

B 1 115

C 566



C 566

D 504

E 1 040

F 1 705


Exterior (Tourer)

A 2 815

B 1 054

C 959



204

2

C 959

D 4 829

E 1 586

F 2 096

G 1 557

H 1 860

I * 1 479

* Without roof bars.


Interior (Tourer)

A 1 060

B 1 115

C 510



C 510

D 851

E 1 058

F 1 723


IDENTIFICATION FEATURES

Various visible marking devices foridentification and tracking of thevehicle.The vehicle type and the identificationnumber are also indicated on the reg-istration document

A. Chassis number plate

On the left hand door centre pillar.

1. EU type approval number.

2. Vehicle identification no. (VIN).

3 Gross vehicle weight

B. Body serial number C. Serial number on dashboard



206

istration document. All CITROËN original replacement

parts are available exclusively withinthe dealer network.For your safety and in order toremain within the terms of theguarantee, you are advised to useonly CITROËN replacement parts.

3. Gross vehicle weight.

4. Gross train weight.

5. Maximum weight on front axle.

6. Maximum weight on rear axle.

D. Paint colour code and tyre

referenceTyre pressure On the left hand door centre pillar.

Observe the tyre pressures indi-cated by CITROËN.Check the tyre pressures regularly,when cold.Never deflate a warm tyre.

When changing tyres, it is impera-tive that the sizes recommendedfor your vehicle are used.

AutoradioAUDIO EQUIPMENT/HANDS-FREE KIT



2

CONTENTS

• 01 First steps pg. 208

• 02 General menu pg. 209

• 03 Audio pg. 210

• 04 Hands-free kit pg. 214

• 05 Control short-cuts pg. 215

• 06 Configuration pg. 216

• 07 Display flow chart pg. 217

• Frequently asked questions pg. 218

our u ora o s co e n suc a way a w on yoperate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in anothervehicle, contact a CITRO N dealer for configuration ofthe system.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operationswhich require prolonged attention while the vehicle isstationary.

en e engne s sw c e o an o prevendischarging of the battery, your Autoradio may switch offafter a few minutes.

FIRST STEPS



208

1

111

. n an vo ume a ustment.

. CD eject.

. Selection of the screen display mode.

. eecton o t e source: ra o an an c anger.

. Selection of the FM1, FM2, FMast and AM wavebands.

. ettng t e au o optons: rontrear a ance, e t rg tbalance, loudness, sound ambiences.

. Displaying of the list of local stations, of the tracks on the CDor of the MP3 directories.

. an on current operat on.

. ra c nnouncement uncton on o .Long press: access to the PTYTYpes of radio Programme) mode.

0. Confirmation.

. utomatc searc or a ower g er requency.Selection of previous/next CD or MP3 track.

. eecton o a ower g er ra o requency.Selection of the previous/next MP3 directory.

. spay ng o t e genera menu.

. uttons to :Selection of a stored radio station.Long press: storing of a station.

15. The DARK button changes the display on the screen toimprove driving comfort at night.st press: g t ng o t e top anner ony.

2nd press: black screen display.r press: return to t e stan ar spay.

2GENERAL MENU



2

AUDIO FUNCTIONS:

adio, CD, options.

TELEPHONE:

an s- ree t , matc ng,

anagement of a communication.

PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION:ve c e parameters, sp ay, anguages.

> MONOCHROME DISPLAY C

For a detailed global view of themenus available, refer to theDisplay flow charts" section ofhis chapter.

AUDIOe externa envronment s, u ngs, tunne s, asement car par s may oc recepton, ncu ng

n mo e. s s a norma e ect o t e way n w c ra o waves are transmtte an oes not

ndicate any failure of the audio equipment.

RDSRADIOSELECTING A STATION



210

Press the SOURCE button severaltimes in succession and select theradio.

ress e u on o seeca wave an : , , as , .

r e y press one o e u ons o

carry out an automatic search of thera o s a ons.

Press one of the buttons to carry out amanual search of the radio stations.

Press the LIST REFRESH button todisplay the list of stations receivedoca y s a ons max mum .To update this list, press for more thanwo secon s.

Select ACTIVATE FREQUENCYFOLLOWING (RDS) then press OK.RDS appears on the display.

Select the FM WAVEBANDunc on en

press OK.

Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS thenpress OK.

Press the MENU button.

FM WAVEBAND PREFERENCES

The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to thesame station by means of frequency following. However, in certainconditions, this RDS station is not followed throughout the countryas radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explainshe loss of reception of the station during a journey.

CDPLAYING A CD

MP3 CDPLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION



2

Insert circular compact discs only.Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDscopied using a personal recorder, may cause faultswhich are no reflection on the quality of the originalp ayer.Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in theplayer, play begins automatically.

o pay a sc w c as area y eeninserted, press the SOURCE buttonseveral times in succession andselect CD.

Press one of the buttons to select atrack on the CD.Press the LIST REFRESH button todisplay the list of tracks on the CD.Press and hold one of the buttons forfast forward or rewind play.

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.The audio equipment searches for all of the musictracks, which may take anything between a fewseconds and several tens of seconds, before playbegins.

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spreaover rec ory eve s. owever, s a v sa e o eep o a m owo eve s o re uce e access me e ore e s p aye .

While the CD is being played, thedirectory flow chart is not followed.

All of the files are displayed on asingle level. To play a disc whichhas already been inserted, press theSOURCE button several times insuccess on an se ec .

Press one of the buttons to select arack on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to

display the list of directories of theMP3 compilation.ress an o one o e u ons or

ast forward or rewind play.

AUDIO

INFORMATION AND ADVICE

MP3 CD CD CHANGERPLAYING A CD (NOT MP3 COMPATIBLE)



212

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,is an audio compression standard which permits the recording ofseveral tens of music files on a single disc.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recordingit is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be playedcorrectly.It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used

for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)or op mum soun qua y.n e par cu ar case o a mu -sess on , e o e s an ar s

recommen e .

The audio equipment will only play files with the extension ".mp3"with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without usingspeca c arac ers e.g. ; o avo any p ayng or spay ngpro ems.

nser e s n e c anger one y.

Press the SOURCE button severaltimes in succession and selectCD CHANGER.

Press one of the buttons on the

numeric keypad to select thecorresponding CD.

Press one of the buttons to select atrack on the CD.

ress an o one o e u ons or

fast forwards or rewind play.

USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)JACK/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE

AUXILIARY SOURCE



2

e con ros are spaye an manage v a epor a e equ pmen .

rs a us e vo ume o your por a e equ pmen .

Then adjust the volume of your audioequipment.

The auxiliary input permits the connection of portable equipment(MP3 player...). It is activated by default.

Connect the portable equipmentpayer… o e au o soc e s

(white and red, RCA type) located inthe glove box using a JACK/RCA audiocable.

Press the SOURCE button severaltimes in succession and select AUX.

HANDS-FREE KIT The services offered by the hands-free kit depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatib

t e uetoot equpment use .

onsut your te ep ones manua an your operator to n out w c servces are ava a e to you

st o mo e teep ones w c o er t e est range o servces s ava a e

rom t e networ .

Consult a CITROËN dealer.MATCHING A TELEPHONE



214

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention onthe part of the driver, the operations for matching of the Bluetoothmobile telephone with your Autoradio's hands-free kit must becarried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Select the accessory which corresponds to thename o e ve c e, a super mpose con gura on

sp ay appears on e mu unc on sp ay.

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function andcarry out a search of the Bluetooth accessoriespresent for the telephone.

e ec e a on e sp ay usnge u ons en con rm y press ng .

Enter the vehicle's authentication code (=1234).Depending on the telephone, you may be askedto enter this code before the superimposedconfiguration display appears.

YES

RECEIVING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed displaon e mu unc on sp ay.

Select the YES tab on the display usingthe buttons and confirm by pressing OK.

ress e s eer ng w ee con ro o accepe ca .

Press the steering wheel control TEL to access yourdirectory.

o a a num er, use e eypa on yourtelephone.

MAKING A CALL

05

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS



2

OFF

LIMIT

CRUISE

LIST

MENU

4

2

3

51

9

9

10

. ct vaton eact vaton o t e ac ane mo e(night driving).

. c up an ncomng ca ang up a ca w c s nprogress.

pen t e teep one menu an spayng o t e ca st.Long press: refuse an incoming call.

. ccess to t e s ort-cut menus n accor ance w t t edisplay on the screen.Confirmation of the function selected from a menu.

otaton:Selection of the previous/next stored RADIO station.

e ecton o t e prev ousnext or rectory.Selection of the previous/next CD in the CD changer.

. an on t e current operaton.Refuse an incoming call.Long press: return to the main display.

. Access to the main menu.

. o ume ncrease.

. Volume decrease.

. Mute.

. : automatc searc or a ower g er requency.CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:seecton o t e prevousnext trac .continuous press: fast forwards/rewind play.

. : spayng o t e st o statons ava a e.Long press: updating of the list of radio stations.CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:

spayng o t e st o an rectory trac s.

06 CONFIGURATION

ADJUSTING THE DATE

AND TIME



216

Press the MENU button.

Using the arrows, selecthe PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION function.

Press to confirm the selection.

s ng e arrows, se ec eCONFIGURATION function.



Using the arrows, select the ADJUSTunc on.

Adjust the parameters one by oneconfirming by pressing the OK button.Next select the OK tab on the display

en con rm.

ADJUST DATE AND TIME-

11

2

3

2

2

1

2

3

7

-AUDIO FUNCTIONS

DISPLAY FLOW CHART monochrome C

FM BAND PREFERENCES

alternative frequencies (RDS)

DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS*

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

CONSULTING DIRECTORIES**

elephone directory



2

4

3

4

3

4

2

3

4

3

4

4

4

3

4

4

4

3

4

4

2

3

3

4

4

4

2

3

4

3

4

3

4

2

3

3

3

4

* The parameters vary according to vehicle

(refer to the "Multifunction displays" section).

ccor ng to compat ty o uetoot te ep one

and service contract.

act vate eactvate

regional mode (REG)

activate/deactivate

ra o- ex n orma on

activate/deactivate

AUDIO CD PREFERENCES

rac ran om p ay

activate/deactivate

CHOICE OF LANGUAGE

v eo r g ness a us men

normal video

inverse video

rg tness - + a ustment

date and time adjustment

day/month/year adjustment

our m nute a ustment

choice of 12 h/24 h mode

choice of units

m - mpg - m

°Celsius/°Fahrenheit

ca og

services directory

customer contact centre

rea own ca

emergency call

switch**

erminate the current call

secre mo e

activate/deactivate

CONFIGURATION

e e on o a ma c

list of matches

consulting matches

st o matc es

choice of a mobile to connect

list of mobiles

e a e e ow groups oge er e answers o e mos requen y as e ques ons concern ng your u ora o.

QUESTION

There is a difference insound quality betweenth diff t di

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted toth li t d t It i d i bl t t

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,

hi h lt i dibl diff h h i

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS



218

the different audio

sources (radio,CD changer...).

the sources listened to. It is advisable to set

the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-RearBalance, Left-Right Balance) to the middleposition, select the musical ambience "None"an se e ou ness correc on o e c vepos on n mo e or o e nac ve pos onn ra o mo e.

hich may result in audible differences when changing source

(radio, CD changer...).

The CD is ejectedautomatically or is notplayed by the player.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player theright way up.

- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannobe played if it is too damaged.

- Check the content in the case of a recordedCD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.- e au o equ pmen s p ayer oes no

p ay s.- ue o na equa e qua y, cer a n recor e

CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audiodata or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.

The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not

recognised by the audio equipment.

The CD player soundis poor.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them insuitable conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selectinan ambience.

QUESTION SOLUTIONRESPONSE

The stored stations donot function (no sound,

. z s spaye ... .

An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to thewaveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which ths a ons are s ore .

The traffic announcement(TA) is displayed I do

Tune to a radio station which broadcasts trafficinformation

The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network.



2

(TA) is displayed. I donot receive any trafficn orma on.

information.

The quality of receptionof the radio stationlistened to graduallye er ora es or e

s ore s a ons onot function (nosound, 87.5 Mhz isdisplayed...).

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to orthere is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicleis travelling.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) blockreception, including in RDS mode.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when goingthrough a car wash or into an underground car park).

Activate the RDS function to enable the systemto check whether there is a more powerfultransmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does notindicate a failure of the audio equipment.

Have the aerial checked by a CITRO N dealer.

Sound cut-outs of 1to 2 seconds in radiomode.

During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequencypermitting better reception of the station.

Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenons oo requen an a ways on e same rou e.

With the engine off,the audio equipmentsw c es o a er aew m nu es o use.

When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating timedepends on the battery charge.

e sw c -o s norma : e au o equ pmen sw c es o economy mo ean sw c es o o preven sc argng o e ve ce s a ery.

Start the vehicle's engine to increase the batterycharge.

e message e au osystem is overheated"appears on the display.

Switch the audio system off for a few minutes toallow the system to cool.

In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is toohigh, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protectionmo e ea ng o a re uc on o e vo ume or s opp ng o e p ay ngo e .

av r veMULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHON

GPS EUROP



e av rve s pro ec e n suc a way aw ony opera e n your ve ce. s o e ns a ein another vehicle, contact a CITRO N dealer forconfiguration of the system.

Certain functions described in this handbook will become

available during the course of the year.

CONTENTS● 01 First steps pg. 2

● 02 General operation pg. 4

● 03 Navigation - Guidance pg. 7

● 04 Traffic information pg. 15

● 05 Radio pg. 16● 06 Music media players pg. 17

● 07 Making a telephone call pg. 22

● 08 Configuration pg. 27

● 09 Voice commands

and steering wheel controls pg. 28

● 10 Display flow charts pg. 31●Frequently asked questions central pgs.

For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carriesout operations which require prolonged attention while

e ve c e s s a onary.en e engne s sw c e o an o preven

discharging of the battery, the NaviDrive 3D switches offfollowing the activation of the Energy Economy mode.

01

1

FIRST STEPSNaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL

ort press: c ears t e ast c aracter.



2

2ABC

3DEF

5JKL

4GHI

6MNO

8TUV

7PQRS

9WXYZ

0* #

1

R AD IO M ED IA NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUPADDRBOOK

10

2

3

4

6 12

9

7

8

115

0

*

. e ect.

. : ccess to t e menu.Displaying of the list of stations in alphabetical order (FMwaveband) or frequency order (AM waveband).

MEDIA: Access to the MEDIA menu (Audio CD, Jukebox,External Device). Displaying of the list of tracks. Change ofsource.

: access to t e menu an spay ng oe ast est natons.

: an on t e operaton n progress.

Long press: return to the main display.

TRAFFIC: access to the TRAFFIC menu (function describedin detail in sections 02 and 10).

: access to t e menu unctonescr e n eta n secton .

SETUP: access to the SETUP menu (configuration) (functiondescribed in detail in sections 02 and 10).Long press: GPS coverage.

3. Audio settings (Balance/Fader, Bass/Treble, Musical Ambience...).

. o ume a ustment.ort press: mute.

. utomat c searc or a ra o staton on a ower requency.

Selection of the previous CD or MP3 track.

6. Automatic search for a radio station on a higher frequency.Selection of the next CD or MP3 track.

. orma spay or ac screen.

. e ect on o t e success ve spayng on t e screen oNAV (if navigation is in progress)/TEL (if a conversation is inrogress)/RADIO or MEDIA currently being played.

9. PICK UP: access to the TELEPHONE menu. With Bluetoothconnection, accept an incoming call.

. HANG UP: access to the TELEPHONE menu. Hang upe current ca or reuse an ncomng ca , w t uetoot

connect on.access to t e menu

11. Telephone numeric keypad, pre-selection of 10 radiofrequencies.

12. SD card reader.

Long press: activates the voicerecognt on.

01

FIRST STEPSNaviDrive 3D NAVIGATOR



2ABC 3DEF

5JKL

4GHI

6MNO

8TUV

7PQRS

9WXYZ

0* #

1

13

14

. : con rmaton o t e over- r g t tem on t e screen.

- - recton nav gator: press to t e e t r g t:

When the RADIO screen is displayed: selection of theprevious/next frequency.

When MEDIA is displayed: selection of the previous/nextrack.

en or s spaye : orzonta movement o t emap.

- - recton nav gator: press up own.

When RADIO is displayed: selection of the previous/nextradio station on the list.

en t e screen s spaye : seecton o t eprevous next rectory or .

When MAP or NAV is displayed: vertical movementof the map.

Switch to the next or previous page of a menu.

. otaton o t e rng:

en t e screen s spaye : seecton o t erevious/next radio station on the list.

When the MEDIA screen is displayed: selection of therevious/next CD or MP3 track.

When MAP or NAV is displayed: front/rear map zoom.

02 GENERAL OPERATION

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT



4

SETUP

MEDIA

TRAFFIC

For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Displaflow charts" section of this handbook.

For maintenance of the display, the use of a soft, non-abrasive clothspec ac es c o s recommen e , w ou any a ona pro uc .

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA/VIDEO

a conversa on s n progress

FULL SCREEN MAP

NAVIGATION(If navigation is in progress)

: Access to the SETUP menu: system language andvoice functions, voice initialisation (section 09), date andtime, display, unit and system parameters.Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to thedemonstration mode.

TRAFFIC:access to the traffic menu: displaying of the currenttraffic alerts.

MEDIA: Audio DVD menuVideo DVD menu

02

3 2

GENERAL OPERATION

ressng perm s access o s or cu


avoidance criteria NORMAL



1

2

3

2

1

1

1

3

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

2

ressng perm s access o s or -cu

menus accor ng o e sp ay on e.

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

PLAY OPTIONS

:

ABORT GUIDANCE

REPEAT ADVICE

CANCEL

LENGTHEN DIV.

.

RECALCULATE

ZOOM/SCROLL

ROUTE INFO

SHOW DEST.

route type

:

IN FM MODE

RADIOTEXT

REGIONAL PROG. (REG)

IN AM MODE

FM

:

END CALL

HOLD CALL

DTMF TONES

PRIVATE MODE

sa e es

stages info

TRAVEL ROUTE

VOICE ADVICE

ROUTE OPTIONS

TRACK INFO

SELECT MUSIC

02 GENERAL OPERATIONDISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

MAP: AUDIO DVD:



6

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

1

3

3

3

3

1

2

2

3

3

3

3

2

3

2

3

1

2

2

3

3

3

ABORT/RESUME GUIDANCE

SET DESTINATION/ADD STAGE

POIS NEARBY

OPTION

guide to

a

store position

zoom/scroll

2D MAP

PERSPECTIVE

MAP ORIENT. NORTH

MAP ORIENT. VEHICLE

STOP

GROUP

group 1 . 2/n

normal/random track/intro

TA

audio

subtitles

anges

xamp e

VIDEO DVD:

PLAY

DVD MENUS

menu

ma n menu

lists of titles

c ap ers

03

1 4

SELECTING A DESTINATION

The NAVIGATION voice commands are listed in section 09.

During guidance, a long press on the end of the lights stalk repeats the last guidance

nstructon.



NAV

1

2

3

6

5

4

Press the NAV button again or selecthe NAVIGATION MENU function andpress OK to confirm.

Select the DESTINATION INPUTfunction and press OK to confirm.

Press the NAV button.

Select the letters of the town one byone con rm ng eac me y press ngOK.

Once the country has been selected,turn the ring and select the townfunction. Press OK to confirm.

DESTINATION INPUT

NAVIGATION MENU

NEW DESTINATION INPUT

pre-se s y en er ng e rs ew e ers o e o ns n e

coun ry seec e can e accesse v a e u on on e v r uaeypa .

eec e

INPUT function and press OK toconfirm.

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the AVIGATIONMENU function.

7 9

It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible to select its

orientation via the short-cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP. Press OK then select MAP

SETTINGS and confirm.



8

7

8

10

9

11

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the STREETand N° functions.

Turn the ring and select OK.Press OK to confirm.

Select the SAVE TO ADDRESS BOOK function to re ord theaddress entered in a directory file. Press OK to confirm the selection.The NaviDrive 3D permits the recording of more than 4 000 contactfiles.

o spee up e process, e pos co e can e en ere rec y a erselecting the POST CODE function.Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Select the route type:FAST ROUTE, SHORT ROUTE orOPTIMISED ROUTE and press OKto confirm.

Then select START ROUTEGUIDANCE and the press OK tocon rm.

It is also possible to select a destination FROM ADDRESS BOOKor FROM LAST DESTINATIONS, by selecting a junction, a towncentre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the MA .

FROM LAST DESTINATIONSFROM ADDRESS BOOK

START ROUTE GUIDANCE

Select the road with the colourcorresponding to the route chosenand press OK to confirm and startguidance.

03

51

NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

ROUTE OPTIONS en t e map s spaye on t e screen, you can seect map sett ngs t en at map map n

erspective/3D map/North orientation/vehicle orientation". The displaying of buildings in 3D mode

depends on the progress of the town mapping.



NAV

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

Select the ROUTE DYNAMICSfunction.This function provides access to the

RAFFIC INDEPENDENT, SEMI- an op ons.

Select the AVOIDANCE CRITERIAfunction. This function provides

access to the AVOID options(motorways, toll roads, ferries,tunnels).

urn e r ng an se ec eRECALCULATE function to take intoaccount the route options selected.Press OK to confirm.

ress e u on.

Press the NAV button again or selecte unc on an

press o con rm.

eec e unc on anpress OK to confirm. This function

a ows you o c ange e rou e ype.

Select the ROUTE OPTIONS functionand press OK to confirm.

ROUTE DYNAMICS

ROUTE TYPE

AVOIDANCE CRITERIA

ROUTE OPTIONS

RECALCULATE

NAVIGATION MENU

51

ADDING A STOPOVER Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination has been selected.



10

NAV

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

8

Enter a new address, for example.

nce e new a ress as eenentered, select START GUIDANCEand press OK to confirm.

os on e s opover on e s anpress OK to confirm.


Press the NAV button again or selecthe NAVIGATION MENU function andpress o con rm.

Select the ADD A STOPOVERfunction (5 stopovers maximum) and

press OK to confirm.

Select the STOPOVERS function andpress OK to confirm.

NAVIGATION MENU

STOPOVERS

ADD A STOPOVER


To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 an selectOPTIMISE ROUTE (select a stopover, delete it or mo e it on the lisusing the ring to change the order, confirm its new po ition and finisw .

epea opera ons o as many mes as necessary en se ecRECALCULATE and press OK to confirm.

START GUIDANCE

03

1 6


SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST

Select the POI IN CITY function to

The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various

usinesses, airports...).



NAV

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

ress e u on.


press o con rm.

Select the POI NEARBY function tosearch for POIs around the vehicle.

Select the SEARCH POINTS OF

INTEREST function and press OK tocon rm.

NAVIGATION MENU

SEARCH POINTS OF INTEREST

POI NEARBY

search for POIs in the city required.Select the country then enter thename of the city using the virtualkeypad.

eec efunction to search for POIs near the

rou e.

e ec e unc ono searc or s n e coun ryrequ re .

Select the POI NEAR DESTINATION

unc on o searc or s near epo n o arr va o e rou e.

POI NEAR DESTINATION

POI IN COUNTRY

POI NEAR ROUTE

A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed viathe LIST button on the virtual keypad.

POI IN CITY

03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCEs s

oom ng n on t s con s ows

he new POIs.



12

* according to availability in the country

03

31

UPDATING THE HAZARDOUS LOCATION

OIs




5

3

4

2

NAV

1

Download the HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs updatefile onto an SD card or USB stick from the Internet.This service will be available on www.citroen.fr,www.c roen.co.u en gra ua y ep oye o a o eo er coun res.

Insert the medium (SD card or USB stick) containingthe POI database into the system's SD card reader or

rea er.

Successful downloading is confirmed by a message.

e ec e me um or carused and press OK.

Press NAV, select NAVIGATION, en .

IMPORT POI

NAVIGATION MENU

03

31

SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS




14

5

3

4

NAV1

2

1

Select HAZARDOUS LOCATIONPOIs to gain access to the DISPLAYON MAP, VISUAL ALERT andSOUND ALERT functions.

Select the POI CATEGORIES ONMAP function to select the POIs to be

displayed on the map by default.

ress e u on.

Press the NAV button again or selectthe NAVIGATION MENU function andpress OK to confirm.

Select the SETTINGS function andpress OK to confirm.

NAVIGATION MENU

SETTINGS

POI CATEGORIES ON MAP

When the navigation is displayedon the screen, press OK then selector deselect VOICE MESSAGE toactivate or deactivate the spokengu ance ns ruc ons.

se e vo ume u on o a us evolume.

POINTS OF INTEREST AND HAZARD

LOCATIONS SETTINGS

04

1 3

TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND

DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES

The filters are independent and their results are concealed.

We recommend:

- a filter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffic,

- a filter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a filter on the route on motorway journeys.



TRAFFIC

1

2

6

4

5

3

y seec ng an em rom e s anconfirming by pressing OK, the eventappears on the map on the left withthe detailed description of the eventon the right. To exit press ESC.

Press the TRAFFIC button again orselect the TRAFFIC MENU functionand press OK to confirm.

FILTER BY DISTANCE

Select the FILTER BY DISTANCEunction and press OK to confirm.

The list of TMC messages appears under the TRAFFIIC MENUsor e n or er o p rox m y.

Select the filter of your choice:

MESSAGES ON ROUTE

ALL WARNING MESSAGES

ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE

ALL MESSAGES

The messages appear on the mapand on the list.

TRAFFIC MENU

The TMC icon, at the bottom left of the creen, mayappear in 3 different forms:- No TMC station available,- TMC station available, no message on route,- TMC station available and messages on route (if

gu ance s ac ve .

Select MESSAGE FILTERING andpress OK to confirm.Press the TRAFFIC button.

1 1

05

SELECTING A STATION

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere withe recepton, ncu ng n o owng mo e. s p enomenon s a norma resut o t e

way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the

audio equipment.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE - TRAFFIC INFO

RADIO



16

RADIO

1 1

2

3

When the current radio station isdisplayed on the screen, press OK.

e ra o source s or -cu s menu appears an prov es access oe o owng s or -cu s:

Select the function required and pressOK to confirm to gain access to thecorresponding settings.

TA

The RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listenin to the samestation by means of the frequency following. However, in certain

conditions, this RDS station cannot be followed throughout the enticountry as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. Thisexplains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Press the RADIO button to displaye s o s a ons receve oca y

sor e n a p a e ca or er.Select the station required by turningthe ring and press to confirm.

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for ore than2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confir s that it hasbeen stored.Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the tored radios a on.

RDS

RADIOTEXT


WAVEBAND

When the RADIO screen is displayed, turn thering or use the 4-direction navigator to select theprevious or next station on the list.

While listening to the radio, press buttons forthe automatic search for a lower or higher frequency.

06

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/USB READERINFORMATION AND ADVICE

The audio equipment will only play audio files with the extension



n or er o e a e o pay a recor e or , w enrecording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Jolietstandard.If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be playedcorrectly.It is recommended that the same recording standard is always usedfor an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)for optimum sound quality.n e par cu ar case o a mu -sess on , e o e s an ar s

recommen e .


".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbp and theextension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1,2 & 2.5 udio Layer 3an e orma , an a rev a on o n ows e a u o ane proper y o croso , are au o compresson s an ar s w c

permit the recording of several tens of music files on single disc.

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, ithout using ospecial characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ) to avoid any playing and displayinproblems.

During play, exit the SD Card or USB source before r moving the Scard or the USB stick from its reader.

To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the SB stick wheyou eave your ve c e w e roo open.

51

SELECTING/PLAYINGCD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/USB READER

MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.



18

2A B C

3D EF

5JK L

4GH I

6MN O

8TU V

7PQR S

9WXYZ

0*

#

1

RADIO MEDIA N A V E S C T R A FF I C SETUPA D D RB OOK

4

6

2

7

3

MEDIA

The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may depeon the recording programme and/or the parameters used.We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.Press the MEDIA button.

e ec e unc onand press OK to confirm.

Press this button.

Select the music source required.Press OK to confirm. Play begins.

SELECT MUSIC

ress e u on aga n orselect the MEDIA MENU function andpress OK to confirm.

en e screen s sp aye ,turn the ring up or down to select theprevious or next compatible source.

MEDIA MENU

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under M SIC MENU.

Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the player,the SD card in the card reader or the USBper p era n e rea er. ay egnsau oma ca y.

RADIO MEDIA N A V E SC T RA F FI C SETUPA D D RB OOK

1

06

1 Connect the portable equipment (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…

USING THE EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

VIEWING A VIDEO DVD

I t th DVD i th l Pl



2A B C

3D EF

5JK L

4GH I

6MN O

8TU V

7PQR S

9WXYZ

0* #

1

3

4

22

3

MEDIA

MEDIA

Connect the portable equipment (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…

to the RCA socket (white and red for audio, red and y llow for videoin the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.

ress e u on en pressaga n or se ec e

function and press OK to confirm.

Select the AUX music source andpress OK to confirm. Play beginsautomatically.

Select CHOOSE SOURCE thenEXTERNAL DEVICE (video) andpress OK to activate it.

EXTERNAL DEVICE

The displaying and management of the controls are operated via thportable equipment.

If the external device is not activated, select EXTERN AL DEVICEMANAGEMENT to activate it.

eec e v eo source requre eo , ux ary v eo npu .Press OK to confirm. Play begins.

Press the MEDIA button to gainaccess to the DVD Menu at any time,or o e unc ons o e enuw c a us e v eo r g nesscontrast, image format...).

If the DVD does not appear on thescreen, press the MODE button togain access to the MEDIA screenwhich displays the DVD screen.

Insert the DVD in the player. Playbegins automatically.

The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow youo move e se ec on cursor. ange c ap er y press nge u on.

1 5

JUKEBOXCOPYING A CD, A USB STICK OR AN SD CARD

ONTO THE HARD DISC

Select the tracks required then COPY



20

2A B C

3D EF

5JK L

4GH I

6MN O

8TU V

7PQR S

9WXYZ

0*

#

1

RADIO MEDIA N A V E S C T R A FF I C SETUPA D D RB OOK

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

MEDIA

Select JUKEBOX MANAGEMENTthen COPY and press OK at eachs ep o con rm.

Press the MEDIA button. Press theu on aga n or se ec

MENU and press OK to confirm.

Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB stickor an SD card.

Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the me ium used(CD, USB or SD card).

Select COPY FROM <selected

medium> and press OK to validate.

Select the tracks required then COPY

SELECTION or select all of the tracksusing COPY ALL.

Select NEW FOLDER to create anew folder or select an existing folder(created previously).

<se ec e me um>

NEW FOLDER

: seec o

change them or NO.NO YES

To copy an MP3 CD, then selectCOPY WHILE LISTENING, FASTCOPY/HIGH QUALITY (192 kBit/s) orNORMAL QUALITY (128 kBit/s) thenselect START COPY.

Confirm the warning message bypressing OK to start the copy.

ress e u on

JUKEBOXLISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX

JUKEBOXRENAMING AN ALBUM



MEDIA

MEDIA

ress e u on.Press the MEDIA button again orselect MEDIA MENU and press OKto confirm.

Select JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT

and press OK to confirm.

Select PLAY MODE and press OK toconfirm.

e ec oren press o con rm.

Press the ESC button to return to the first file level.Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.

MEDIA menu>Jukebox Management>Create playlist. Add the trackrequired one by one then save the change. The Playlist play modemust then be selected.

JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT

Press the MEDIA button.

ress e u on aga n orselect MEDIA MENU and press OKto confirm.

Select the JUKEBOX MANAGEMENTfunction and press OK to confirm.

Select DELETE/RENAME and pressOK confirm.

Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able trename or delete a track/directory.

07

1

CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH

ELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE

MAKING A TELEPHONE CALL



22

2

To activate the Bluetooth telephoneor e n erna e ep one, press

.

Select TELEPHONE MENU, then

SELECT TELEPHONE then choosee ween ,or

ELEPHONE. Press OK at each stepo confirm.

The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth t lephone andone SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the luetoothtelephone.

07

4

The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility

of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check whic

servces you ave access to. st o mo e teep ones w c o er t e est range o serv ces s

ava a e rom eaers.


CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH

TELEPHONE

For safety reasons and because they require prolong d attention on

For a first connection select



1

3

5

2

1

y y q p g

the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobiletelephone to the hands-free system of the NaviDrive D must becarried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.The last telephone connected is reconnectedautomatically.

If no telephone is connected, thesystem prompts you to CONNECTPHONE. Select YES and press OKo confirm.

n er e au en ca on co e on etelephone. The code to be entered isdisplayed on the screen.

o c ange e e ep one connec e ,press e u on, en seecTELEPHONE MENU, thenSELECT PHONE then CONNECTBLUETOOTH TELEPHONE thenselect the telephone required or

SEARCH PHONE.Press OK at each step to confirm.

nce e eep one as een connec e , e av r e cansync ron se e a ress oo an e ca s . s sync ronsa onmay take a few minutes.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears on

the multifunction display. Select the telephone required then selectCONNECT PHONE for a new connection. Select DE ETE PHONEto cancel the connection to the telephone.

Press the TEL button.

For a first connection, select

SEARCH PHONE and press OK toconfirm. Then select the name of thetelephone.

SEARCH PHONE

7

USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE

WITH SIM CARD


you ave ec ne to use t e nterna teep one or persona ca s, you can st connect a uetoot

e ep one to receve your ca s on t e ve ce s au o system.



24

2ABC

3DEF

5JKL

4GHI

6MNO

8TUV

7PQRS

9WXYZ

0* #

1

x rac e o er y press ng e e ec u on.

Install the SIM card in the holderand then insert it in the slot.

To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attentionon the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations mustbe carried out when stationary.

Enter the PIN code on the keypadthen select OK and confirm.

e sys em as s,

select YES if you wish to use yourSIM card for your personal calls.Otherwise, only the emergency calland the services will use the SIMcard.

When entering your PIN code, tick the STORE PIN tab to gainaccess to the telephone without having to enter this code when it isused subsequently.

Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronisehe address book and the call list.This synchronisation may take a few minutes.

1 1

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superi posed display



3

2

3

2

ress e en o e s eer ng w ee con ro oaccep e ca or en e ca n progress.

Select the YES tab to accept or NO torefuse and confirm by pressing OK.

g y g p p p y

on e screen.

YES

To hang up, press the HANG UP TELu on or press an seec

en con rm y press ng .

HANG UP TEL

Press the PICK UP TEL button.

ress e en o e s eer ng w ee con ro or more an wosecon s o ga n access o e a ress oo .

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You caselect DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK. The NaviDrive 3D permits threcording of up to 4 096 entries.

Select DIAL NUMBER, then dial theelephone number using the virtual

keypad.

Select the TELEPHONE MENUunc on an press o con rm.

DIAL NUMBER

TELEPHONE MENU

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appeaunder TELEPHONE MENU. You can select a number and press Oto make the call.

The PICK UP TEL button accepts, the HANG UP TEL button refusesthe incoming call.

EMERGENCY CALLEXCEPT NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL

CONSULTING THE SERVICES

Warning, the emergency call and the services are only active if the internal telephone is used

with a valid SIM card. With a Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are

not operational.



26

SOS

* On condition that the CITRO N Emergency contract has been signed.This is free and of unlimited duration. Consult a CITROËN dealer.

CITROËN ASSISTANCE

CUSTOMER CONTACT CENTRE

* These services and options are subject to conditions and availability.

Press this button to gain access to the CITROËNservices*.

e e co reques any n orma on

about the CITRO N marque.

Select CITRO N ASSISTANCE toma e a rea own ass s ance ca .

In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audiblesignal is heard and a CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATIONscreen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).

A call is made to the emergency services (112).In certain countries*, this emergency call is made directlyby the CITROËN Emergency team which locates thevehicle and alerts the appropriate emergency services asqu c y as poss e.

necessary, e n erna e ep one s ac va e au oma ca y oma e an emergency ca .

51

08 CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIME

rncpe o t e sync ro:

. on rm t e sync ro seecton, t e tme s t en set to unversa tme, t e ate s a s

p ate .

2. Using the 4-direction navigator, move to the time fields and press OK.

3. You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your choice.

ake care when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone must be changed again

anually.

This function provides access to the options according to the SETUP flow chart.



6

SETUP

2

3

4

Set the parameters using the ring andmove on to the next by moving the

- rec on navga or.Press OK to confirm.

Select the DATE FORMAT functionand press OK to confirm.

e ec e orma requ re us ng er ng an press o con rm.

Select the SET DATE AND TIMEunc on an press o con rm.

ress ng e u on or more an secon s perm saccess o:

Press the SET UP button.

e ec e unc on

an press o con rm.Select the format required using thering and press OK to confirm.

SET DATE AND TIME

Select the DATE AND TIME functionand press OK to confirm.

DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT

GPS COVERAGE

DEMO MODE

DATE AND TIME

09

VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

C5 STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS



28

LIST

MENU

1

2

4

3

5

9

10

11

. uccessve presses: ac ane mo e- ac screen ng t r vng .

. ort press to ma e a te ep one ca .c up ang up.

Access the telephone menu.Display the call list.Long press to reject an incoming call.

. otaton: prov es access to t e s ort-cut menus accor ng to t e spay on t e screen.ort press: con rm t e c o ce spaye on screen.

ong press: return to t e ma n menu.

. ort press: a an on t e current operaton.e ect an ncom ng teep one ca .

Long press: return to the initial display.

5. Menu: provides access to the main menu.

6. VOL +: volume increase.

7. VOL -: volume decrease.

. uccess ve presses: mute restore soun .

. ort press: a o: g er requency.Music players: next track.Long press for fast play.

10. Short press: Radio: lower frequency.Music players: previous track.Long press for fast play.

11. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or the list of tracks, albums,irectories.

Long press: update the list of stationsreceived.Short press: activate the voice recognition.ong press: repeat t e current nav gaton

nstructon.

uccess ve presses: prov es access toe a o an e a screen accor ng to

he current display.

VOICE COMMANDS -

VOICE RECO. INITIATION

ACTION

VOICE COMMAND USE OF THE COMMAND

e p a ress o o

p vo ce contro

H lp media

H lp navigation

H lp telephone

ccess to t e a ress oo ep

ccess to t e voce reco e p

Access to the media management help

Access to the guidance, navigation help

Access to the telephone help



SETUP

0*

e ore us ng e sys em or e rs me, youare a v se o s en o, say an repea einstructions for use.

Press the SETUP button andseec eVOICE FUNCTIONS function.Turn the ring and select VOICE

RECO. PARAMETERS. Activatethe voice recognition.Select INSTRUCTIONS FORUSE.

The phrases to be spoken according to the environment ofthe level 1 selection are indicated in level 2.Speak and NaviDrive 3D acts.

ong press: ac va es e vo ce recogn on.

H lp telephone

H lp radio

Cancel

orrect on

Access to the telephone help

Access to the radio help

o cance a vo ce comman w c s n progres

equest to correct t e ast vo ce recogn t on

carre out

ear

RADIO Select station

Station <tts:stationName>

Read out station list

Enter frequency

e ect wave an

TA on

TA off

Select a radio station

Select a radio station using its RDS description

<tts:station Name> from the RADIO list

sten to t e st o statons ava a e

sten to t e requency o t e current ra o stat

oose t e requency wave an or

Change the frequency waveband to AM

Change the frequency waveband to FM Activate the Traffic Info (TA)

Deactivate the Traffic Info

estnat on nput

Voice advice off

Voice advice on

Save address

Start guidance

ort gu ance

v gate entry

earc

omman to enter a new est naton a ress

Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions

Activate the spoken guidance instructions

Save an address in the address book

Start guidance (once the address has been

entered)

top gu ance

tar t gu ance to a e n t e a ress oo

tart gu ance to a pont o nterest

VOICE RECO. INITIATIONMEDIA Media

Select media

nge sot

u e ox

Select the MEDIA source

Choose a source

e ect t e p ayer source

eect t e u e ox source

e ect t e rea er source



30

External device

Changer

SD-card

Track <1 - 1 000>

sc < - >

o er < - >

Select the audio AUX input source

Select the CD changer source

Select the SD card source

Select a specific track (number between 1 and

1 000) on the active MEDIUM

eect a num er etween an n t e

anger to e actvate

eect a o er num er etween an

on the active MEDIUM

TELEPHONE Phone menu

Enter number

Phone book

a ave num er

ccept

e ect

Open the Telephone Menu

Enter a telephone number to be called

Open the phone book

a e a caave a num er n t e p one oo

ccept an ncomng ca

e use an ncomng ca

BOOK

ress oo menu

Call <entry>

Navigate <entry>

pen t e a ress oo

Call file using its description <file> as described

n the address book

Start guidance to an address in the address boo

sing its description <file>

10

MEDIA

1

2

3

1

2

3

3

22

3

3TRAFFIC

MAIN FUNCTION

c o ce

choice A2

CHOICE B...

DISPLAY FLOW CHARTS

"MEDIA" MENU

SELECT SOURCE

au o au o v eo

VIDEO SETTINGS

display format

anguages



1

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

2

3

3

2

2

4

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

3

4

4

4

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

"TRAFFIC" MENU

MESSAGE FILTERING

a messages on rou e

warning messages on route

warning messages only

a ypes o message

filter by distance

deactivated

w t n a ra us o m es m

within a radius of 3 miles (5 km)

within a radius of 6 miles (10 km)

w t n a ra us o m es m

CD changer

jukebox

car

USB

external device (audio/video)

display settings

brightness

contrast

colours

video standard (AUX)

n a se v eo se ngs

READING OF MESSAGES

on consultation of the message

on recep on o e message

TMC STATIONS INFORMATION

copy

create folder

e e e rename

edit playlists

play mode

o ers es

Playlist

memory s a us

refer to the "AUDIO SETTINGS" menu

EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX) MANAGEMENT

off/audio/audio and video

RADIO

1

2

3

3

2

NAV

1

2

4

3

2

2

3

4

4

4

4

3

STOPOVERS

a s opover

enter new address

gu e me ome

rom a ress o o

from last destinations

op m se rou e

repace s opover

"RADIO" MENU

AM/FM WAVEBAND

wave an

AM waveband

SELECT FREQUENCY

"NAVIGATION" MENU

ENTER DESTINATION

enter new address

country



32

1

2

3

3

3

2

2

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

2

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

4

3

3

3

4

4

4

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

guidance criteria

near estnat on

s ort route

repace s opover

delete stopover

reca cua e

ast route

short route

optm se route

refer to the "AUDIO SETTINGS" menu

BALANCE/FADER

nearby

near es na on

n a own

in a country

a ong e rou e

BASS/TREBLE

none

classical

azz

rock/pop

echno

voca

CUT OUT REAR SPEAKERS

LOUDNESS

INITIALISE AUDIO SETTINGS

own

road

num er

start guidance

post code

a to a ress oo

unction

own centre

coor nates

entering on map

guide me home

rom as es na ons

rom address book

3

2

4

4

4

4

1

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

2

3

3

route dynamics

raffic independent

sem- ynamc

optimised route

chargeable service

"TELEPHONE" MENU

DIAL

SETTINGS

automatic voice mail

ca s g na

select ring tone

set ring volume

en er message serv ce num er

CALL LIST

MESSAGES



3

4

4

4

ADDRBOOK

4

3

4

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

4

3

5

3

3

5

5

5

5

3

3

3

3

automatic

avoidance criteria

avo motorways

avoid tolls

avoid tunnels

avo erres

recalculate

"ADDRESS BOOK" MENU

internal telephone settings

PIN settings

ne wor se e c on

SIM card memory status

CREATE NEW FILE

EXPORT ADDRESS BOOK

CLEAR ALL VOICE DESCRIPTIONS

CLEAR CONTENT OF "MY ADDRESSES"

none

bluetooth telephone

n erna e ep one

connect bluetooth telephone

search phone

disconnect phone

rename phone

delete phone

delete all phones

display details

SETUP

1

2

3

4

2

3

3

3

3

2

4

4

2

4

4

SETUP

LANGUAGES AND VOICE FUNCTIONS

anguages

deutsch

eng s

espano

DATE AND TIME

se a e an me

a e orma

ime format

DISPLAY

r g ness

map colour

map n ay mo e

map n ng t mo e

map auto day/night

UNITS

empera ure



34

3

4

3

4

4

4

2

3

4

4

3

4

4

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

4

4

5

5

5

4

5

5

3

p

français

ta ano

ne er an s

polski

portuguese

vo ce reco. parame ers

voice recognition active

instructions for use

basic rules

example of use

tips

perso. vo ce programm ng

new programming operation

clear active programming

voce syn esser voume

g

colour scheme

stee

ue g t aytme ony

orange ray

blue flame

p

celsius

fahrenheit

s ance

km

m es

restore factory configuration

software version

scro ng ex

sound quality betweenthe different audiosources (radio, CD, CD

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted tothe sources listened to. It is advisable to setthe AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear


hich may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD,CD changer...).

e a e e ow groups oge er e answers o e mos requen y as e ques ons concern ng e av r ve .

QUESTION RESPONSE




changer...). Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middleposition, select the musical ambience "None"an se e ou ness correc on o e c vepos on n mo e or o e nac ve pos onn ra o mo e.




- Check the content in the case of a recordedCD: consult the advice in the Audio section.

- e au o equ pmen s p ayer oes nop ay s.

- ue o na equa e qua y, cer a n recor eCDs will not be played by the audio system.

- The CD changer does not play MP3 CDs.


The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is notrecognised by the audio equipment.


Insert good quality CDs and store them insuitable conditions.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.

e au o equpmen se ngs ass, re e, am ences are unsu a e. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selectinan ambience.

SOLUTIONRESPONSE

e s ore s a ons onot function (no sound,87.5 Mhz is displayed...)

n ncorrec wave an s se ec e .

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to orthere is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle

ress , se ec eno re urn o e wave an on w c

the stations are stored.

Activate the RDS function by means of the shorcut menu to enable the system to check whethe

The quality of reception ofhe radio station listened



36

s rave ng.


ere s a more power u ransm er n egeograp ca area.


Sound cut-outs of 1to 2 seconds in radiomode.


Deactivate the RDS function by means of thes or -cu menu e p enomenon s oo requean a ways on e same rou e.

With the engine off, thesystem switches off aftera ew m nu es o use.

When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends onthe battery charge.

e sw c -o s norma: e sys em sw c es o economy mo e answitches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.


The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when goingthrough a car wash or into an underground car park).

Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.

o gradually deterioratesor the stored stations donot function (no sound,87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

QUESTION SOLUTION

eox s c e . owever,

certain traffic jamsalong the route are notindicated in real time.

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive thetraffic information.

Wait until the traffic information is being receivedcorrectly (displaying of the traffic informationsymbols on the map).

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, ...) are listed for thetraffic information.

The time taken tocalculate a route

s p enomenon s norma. e sys em sdependent on the traffic information available.

The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVDis being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being

Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stopthe copying before starting the guidance functio



sometimes seemslonger than usual. calculated.

Does the emergency callfunction work without aSIM card?

No, European regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order tomake an emergency call.

Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.

The altitude is notdisplayed.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes toreceive more than 4 satellites correctly.

Wait until the system has started up completely.Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button,then select GPS COVERAGE).

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, ...) or the weather,the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.

This phenomenon is normal. The system isdependent on the conditions of reception of theGPS signal.

The route calculation isnot successful.

The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion oftoll roads on a toll motorway).

Check the exclusion criteria on the NAV menu(GUIDANCE OPTION-EXCLUSION CRITERIA

SOLUTION

There is a long waitingperiod following the insertionof a CD or SD card.

When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount ofdata (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.

This phenomenon is normal.

QUESTION RESPONSE

I cannot connect myue oo e ep one.

The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipmentmay no e vs e.

- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth functios sw c e on.

- Check that your telephone is visible.

e ue oo e ep one s no compa e w e sys em. A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones



38

The system does notplay the DVD.

The region protection may not be compatible. Insert DVDs which have compatible regionprotection.

canno copy e oe u e ox.

e wrong source s se ec e . ange e ac ve source o .

The CD is copy-protected. It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copie

The system does notreceive SMS.

The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system. Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.

The SIM card used is a twin card. Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.

s ava a e rom e ea er ne wor .

MyWayMULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHON

GPS EUROPE BY SD CAR

CO S



e y ay s pro ec e n suc a way a w on yopera e n your ve c e. s o e ns a e n ano ervehicle, contact a CITRO N dealer for configuration ofthe system.

Certain functions described in this handbook will becomeavailable during the course of the year.

CONTENTS● 01 First steps pg. 2

● 02 General operation pg. 4

● 03 Navigation - Guidance pg. 6

● 04 Traffic information pg. 13

● 05 Radio pg. 14● 06 Music media players pg. 15

● 07 Bluetooth telephone pg. 18

● 08 Configuration pg. 20

● 09 Steering wheel controls pg. 22

● 10 Display flow charts pg. 24

● Frequently asked questions central pgs.

For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries

out operations which require prolonged attention whilee ve c e s s a onary.

en e engne s sw c e o an o prevendischarging of the battery, the MyWay switches offfollowing the activation of the Energy Economy mode.

01 FIRST STEPSMY WAY CONTROL PANEL



2

1 11

01

FIRST STEPSMY WAY CONTROL PANEL



5

10

2

3 4 6

13

9

14 15

7 812

16

. n .

car pause, mute or t e ra o.ong press: ren t a sat on o t e system.

. o ume a ustment.

3. Access to the RADIO menu. Displaying of the list of stations.

4. Access to the MUSIC menu. Displaying of the tracks.

- ong press: access to t e sett ngs: ront rear an e t r g ta ance, asstre e, equa zer, ou ness, automat c voume

a ustment, nt a se t e settngs.

. Access to the SETUP menu.ong press: access to t e coverage an t eemonstraton mo e.

. ccess to t e menu. spay ng o t e ca st.

. Access to the MODE menu.Selection of the successive displaying of:

a o, ap, nav gat on s n progress , e ep onea conversaton s n progress , r p omputer.

ong press: sp ayng o a ac screen .

8. Access to the NAVIGATION menu. Displaying of the lastestnatons.

9. Access to the TRAFFIC menu. Displaying of the current trafficalerts.

10. ESC: abandon the operation in progress.

. e ect.

. eecton o t e prevousnext ra o staton rom t e st.

e ecton o t e prevousnext .e ecton o t e prev ousnext rectory.

Selection of the previous/next page of a list.

. eecton o t e prevousnext ra o staton.e ecton o t e prevousnext or trac .e ecton o t e prevousnext ne o a st.

. uttons to :eecton o t e store ra o staton.eecton o t e n t e c anger.ong press: storng o t e current ra o staton.

. SD card reader.

16. Dial for selection on the display on the screenand according to the context of the menu.

Short press: confirmation.

02 GENERAL OPERATION

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following menus:



4

For a detailed global view of the menus available,refer to section 10.

For maintenance of the display, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

HONE

(If a conversation is in progress)

TRIP COMPUTER

ULL SCREEN MAP

NAVIGATION

(If navigation is in progress)

SETUP:

system language, date and time, display,ve c e parame ers, un s an sys em parame ers,

TRAFFIC:n orma on an messages

02

1 1

GENERAL OPERATION

press on e a o perm s accesso s or -cu menus accor ng o e

display on the screen

TRIP COMPUTER:

ALERT LOG

STATUS OF FUNCTIONS

RADIO:

IN FM MODE

TA




1

2

3

3

2

1

1

1

3

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

display on the screen. STATUS OF FUNCTIONS

:

TA

PLAY OPTIONS

norma

random track

repeat folder

rac n ro

SELECT MUSIC

:

ABORT GUIDANCE

REPEAT ADVICE

ROUTE INFO

show dest.

r p n o

route type

avoidance criteria

sa e es

zoom/scroll

VOICE ADVICE

TA

RDS

ra o ex

regional prog. (REG)

AM

TA

refresh AM list

AP:

ABORT/RESUME GUIDANCE

POIS NEARBY

POSITION INFO

ZOOM/SCROLL

PHONE:

HOLD CALL

DIAL

PRIVATE MODE

MICRO OFF

03

1 4


SELECTING A DESTINATION nsert t e car n t e ront pane rea er an eave t t ere to use t e avgaton unctons.

The navigation SD card data must not be changed.

The map data updates are available from CITROËN dealers.

Select the NEW DESTINATION

INPUT f ti d th di l t



6

2

3

6

5

Press the NAV button again or selecthe NAVIGATION MENU function andpress the dial to confirm.

eec eunc on an press e a o con rm.


Select the letters of the town one byone con rm ng eac me y press ng

e a.

Once the country has been selected,turn the dial and select the townfunction. Press the dial to confirm.

NAVIGATION MENU

DESTINATION INPUT

pre-se s y en er ng e rs ew e ers o e o ns n ecoun ry seec e can e accesse v a e u on on e v r uaeypa .

INPUT function and press the dial toconfirm.


The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the AVIGATIONMENU function.

7 9

urng gu ance, pressng t e en o t e g ts sta repeats t e ast gu ance nstructon.

T th di l d l t OK

Then select START ROUTEGUIDANCE and the press the dial to

fi



8

10

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the STREETand N° functions.

Turn the dial and select OK.Press the dial to confirm.

Select the SAVE TO ADDRESS BOOK function to re ord theaddress entered in a directory file. Press the dial to c nfirm the

selection.MyWay permits the recording of up to 4 000 contact files.

o spee up e process, e pos co e can e en ere rec y a erselecting the POST CODE function.Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Select the route type:FAST ROUTE, SHORT ROUTE orOPTIMISED ROUTE and press thedial to confirm.

confirm.

ou can zoom n zoom ou on e map us ng e a .s poss e o scro e map or se ec s or en a on a e

short-cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP. Press the dial thenselect MAP SETTINGS or ZOOM/SCROLL and confirm.

It is also possible to select a destination FROM ADDRESS BOOK oFROM LAST DESTINATIONS.

FROM ADDRESS BOOK FROM LAST DESTINATIONS

START ROUTE GUIDANCE

03

51


ROUTE OPTIONS

Select the ROUTE DYNAMICS

function

The route selected by the MyWay audio/telephone depends directly on the route options.

Changing these options may change the route completely.



8

6

7

2

3

4

function.This function provides access to theRAFFIC INDEPENDENT or SEMI-

DYNAMIC options.

Select the AVOIDANCE CRITERIAfunction. This function provides

access o e op ons(motorways, toll roads, ferries).

Turn the dial and select theRECALCULATE function to take intoaccount the route options selected.Press the dial to confirm.

ress e u on.

ress e u on aga n or seeche NAVIGATION MENU function andpress the dial to confirm.

Select the ROUTE TYPE function andpress the dial to confirm. This functionallows you to change the route type.

Select the ROUTE OPTIONS functionand press the dial to confirm.

NAVIGATION MENU

ROUTE OPTIONS

ROUTE TYPE

ROUTE DYNAMICS

AVOIDANCE CRITERIA

RECALCULATE

51

ADDING A STOPOVER

Enter a new address for example

topovers can e a e to t e route once t e est nat on as een seecte .



6

7

2

3

4

Enter a new address, for example.

Once the new address has beenentered, select OK and press the dialto confirm.

e ec an press edial to confirm.


Press the NAV button again or selecthe NAVIGATION MENU function andpress e a o con rm.

Select the ADD A STOPOVERfunction (5 stopovers maximum) andpress the dial to confirm.

Select the STOPOVERS function andpress the dial to confirm.

NAVIGATION MENU

STOPOVERS

ADD A STOPOVER

ENTER A NEW ADDRESS

OK

The stopover must be completed or deleted in order f r the guidancto continue to the next destination. Otherwise, MyWay will alwaysreturn you to the previous stopover.

RECALCULATE

03

1 6


SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST

ress e u on

Select the POI IN CITY function tosearch for POIs in the city required.

Select the country then enter thef h i i h i l

The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various

usinesses, airports...).



10

2

3

4

7

8

5

ress e u on.


press e a o con rm.

Select the POI NEARBY function tosearch for POIs around the vehicle.

Select the SEARCH POINTS OFINTEREST function and press the

a o con rm.

NAVIGATION MENU

SEARCH POINTS OF INTEREST

POI NEARBY

Select the country then enter thename of the city using the virtualkeypad.

eec efunction to search for POIs near therou e.

e ec e unc ono searc or s n e coun ryrequ re .

Select the POI NEAR DESTINATIONunc on o searc or s near epo n o arr va o e rou e.

POI NEAR DESTINATION

POI IN COUNTRY

POI NEAR ROUTE

A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed viathe LIST button on the virtual keypad.

POI IN CITY

03 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCEs o s

Zooming in on this iconshows the new POIs.



* according to availability in the country

03

41

NAVIGATION SETTINGS

e ec e unc on

an urn e a o se e voume


Contact a CITROËN dealer for details of the procedure for obtaining the HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs

The updating of the HAZARDOUS LOCATION POIs requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible read



12

6

52

3

an urn e a o se e voumeof each voice synthesiser (trafficinformation, alert messages…).

Select HAZARDOUS LOCATIONPOIs to gain access to the DISPLAYON MAP, VISUAL ALERT andSOUND ALERT functions.

Select the POI CATEGORIES ONMAP function to select the POIs to bedisplayed on the map by default.

NAVI VOLUME


ress e u on aga n or seecthe NAVIGATION MENU function andpress the dial to confirm.

Select the SETTINGS function andpress the dial to confirm.

NAVIGATION MENU

SETTINGS

POI CATEGORIES ON MAP

s

04

1 3

TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND

DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES

Press the TRAFFIC button

e ters are n epen ent an t e r resuts are cumuatve.

e recommen a ter on t e route an a ter aroun t e ve ce o:

- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffic,

- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traffic,

- 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).

Select the filter of your choice:



2

5

4

On the list which appears, selectthe distance radius required in

accordance with the route.ress e a o con rm e seec on.

ress e u on aga n orselect the TRAFFIC MENU functionand press the dial to confirm.

GEOGRAPHICAL FILTER (NONE)

Press the TRAFFIC button.

Select the GEOGRAPHICAL FILTER(NONE) function and press the dial toconfirm.

The list of TMC messages appears under the TRAFFIIC MENUsor e n or er o p rox m y.

MESSAGES ON ROUTE


The messages appear on the mapand on the list.o ex , press .

TRAFFIC MENU

The TMC icon, at the bottom left of the creen, mayappear in 3 different forms:- No TMC station available,

- TMC station available, no message on route,- TMC station available and messages on routegu ance s ac ve .

1 1

05

SELECTING A STATION

en e curren ra o s a on s

sp aye on e screen, press edial

e externa envronment , u ng, tunne , un ergroun car par ... may nter ere w t

he reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the

way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the

audio equipment.

RDS - REGIONAL MODE - TRAFFIC INFO

Press the RADIO button to display

RADIO



14

2

3

sp aye on e screen, press edial.

e ra o source s or -cu s menu appears an prov es access oe o owng s or -cu s:

Select the function required and pressthe dial to confirm to gain access tothe corresponding settings.

TA

The RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listenin to the samestation by means of the frequency following. However, in certainconditions, this RDS station cannot be followed throughout the enticountry as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the te ritory. Thisexplains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Press the RADIO button to displaye s o s a ons receve oca y

sor e n a p a e ca or er.Select the station required by turningthe dial and press to confirm.

While listening to the radio, press one of thebuttons to select the previous or next station on

e s .

ress one o e u ons on e numer c eypa or ore an secon s o s ore e curren s a on.

Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the tored radiostation.

RDS

RADIOTEXT


A long press of one of the buttons starts theautomatic search for a station with a lower orhigher frequency.

06 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARDINFORMATION AND ADVICE

t e s use , t e navgaton car must reman n t e y ay au o teep one rea er.

In this case, it is not possible to play an SD card containing MP3 files.


".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbp and theextension " wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1,2 & 2.5 udio Layer 3

an e orma , an a rev a on o n ows e a u o an



n or er o e a e o pay a recor e or , w enrecording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Jolietstandard.If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be playedcorrectly.It is recommended that the same recording standard is always usedfor an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)for optimum sound quality.n e par cu ar case o a mu -sess on , e o e s an ar s

recommen e .

.mp3 with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbp and theextension .wma with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

an e orma , an a rev a on o n ows e a u o ane proper y o croso , are au o compresson s an ar s w c

permit the recording of several tens of music files on single disc.

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, ithout using ospecial characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ) to avoid any playing and displayinproblems.

During play, exit the SD Card mode before removing the SD cardfrom its reader.

To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card when you leave your

ve c e w e roo own.

1 4

SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC

CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD

Press the MUSIC button

Select the music source required:

, ,



16

2

3

5

6

The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilationmay depend on the recording programme and/or the arameters

used. We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.

Press the MUSIC button.

Select the SELECT MUSIC functionan press e a o con rm.

ress e up or own u on o se ecthe next/previous folder.

, ,… ress e a o con rm.

ay eg ns.

SELECT MUSIC

Press the MUSIC button again orselect the MUSIC MENU function andpress the dial to confirm.

Press one of the buttons to select amusic track.Press and hold one of the buttons forfast forward or rewind play.

MUSIC MENU

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under M SIC MENU.

1 1

06

Connect the portable equipment (MP3/WMA player… to the audiosockets (white and red RCA type) in the glove box using a JACK/

Insert one or more CDs in thechanger. Press the MUSIC button.

USING THE EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)

AUDIO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

CD CHANGER

PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3/WMA COMPATIBLE)

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS



2

3

4

4

2

3

5

p q p ( p ysockets (white and red, RCA type) in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.

Press the MUSIC button then pressit again or select the MUSIC MENUunc on an press e a o con rm.

Select the AUX music source andpress the dial to confirm. Play beginsautomatically.

Select the EXTERNAL DEVICEunc on an press e a o ac vae .

EXTERNAL DEVICE

g

Press one of the buttons on the

numeric keypad to select thecorrespon ng .

Select the CD CHANGER musicsource and press the dial to confirm.

The displaying and management of the controls are operated via theportable equipment.

CD CHANGER

Select the SELECT MUSIC functionand press the dial to confirm.

SELECT MUSIC

Press the MUSIC button again orselect the MUSIC MENU function andpress e a o con rm.

MUSIC MENU

07

4

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth

equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you

ave access to. s t o mo e teep ones w c o er t e est range o servces s ava a e

rom

ea ers.

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

CONNECTING A TELEPHONE

For safety reasons and because they require prolong d attention onthe part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Blu

etooth mobiletelephone to the hands-free system of the MyWay must be carried

For a first connection, select

SEARCH PHONE and press the dialto confirm Then select the name of



18

1

3

5

2

1

2

p y y yout with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.The last telephone connected is reconnectedautomatically.

Select the TELEPHONE MENUfunction and press the dial to confirm.

TELEPHONE MENU

n er e au en ca on co e on etelephone. The code to be entered isdisplayed on the screen.

To change the telephone connected,press the PHONE button, then selectTELEPHONE MENU and press thedial to confirm.

nce e e ep one as een connec e , y ay can sync ron see a ress oo an e ca s . s sync ron sa on may a e a

few minutes.

Select CONNECT PHONE. Select the

telephone and press to confirm.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears

on the multifunction display. Select the telephone req ired for a newconnec on.

Press the PHONE button.

pto confirm. Then select the name ofthe telephone.

SEARCH PHONE

CONNECT PHONE

1 1

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superi posed display Press the PHONE button.



2

3

2

3

Press the end of the steering wheel control to

accep e ca or en e ca n progress.

Select the YES tab to accept or NOto refuse and confirm by pressing thedial.

g y g p p p yon the multifunction display.

YES

To hang up, press the PHONE buttonor press e a an se ec

en con rm y press ng ea .

END CALL

ress e en o e s eer ng w ee con ro or more n wo secono ga n access o e a ress oo .

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You case ec . y ay perm e recor no up o en r es.

Select DIAL NUMBER, then dial theelephone number using the virtual

keypad.

Select the TELEPHONE MENUunction and press the dial to confirm.

DIAL NUMBER

TELEPHONE MENU

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle appeaun er . ou can seec a num er an press e

a o ma e e ca .

08

51

CONFIGURATION

SETTING THE DATE AND TIMEs unct on prov es access to t e optons: , ,

DISPLAY (BRIGHTNESS, COLOUR, MAP COLOUR), VEHICLE PARAMETERS, UNITS,

SYSTEM PARAMETERS.

Press the SET UP button



20

6

2

3

4

Set the parameters one by one usinghe direction arrows and confirm bymeans of the dial.

Select the DATE FORMAT functionan press e a o con rm.

Select the SET DATE AND TIMEunc on an press e a o con rm.

Confirm the format required using the dial.Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 secondspermits access to:

Press the SET UP button.

on rm e orma requre usnge a.

Select the TIME FORMAT functionand press the dial to confirm.

SET DATE AND TIME

Select the DATE AND TIME functionand press the dial to confirm.

DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT

DEMO MODE

DATE AND TIME

1

TRIP COMPUTER/VEHICLE PARAMETERS

VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS

ange: spays e s ance w c can rave e w e reman nfuel detected in the tank, in relation to the average co sumption ov

A FEW DEFINITIONS



- e ve c e a :e range, e curren consump on

an e s ance reman ng.- The "1" (route 1) tab with:

The average speed, the averageconsumption and the distancetravelled calculated over route "1".

- The "2" (route 2) tab with the samefunctions for a second route.

p yfuel detected in the tank, in relation to the average co sumption ovthe last few miles (kilometres).This displayed value may vary significantly following a change in thvehicle speed or the relief of the route.When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed

er ng w a eas res o ue , e range s reca cu a e ans spaye w en excee s m es m .If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed continuously in place of thedigits, contact a CITRO N dealer.

Current consumption: only calculated and displaye above 20 m(30 km/h).

Average consumption: this is the average quantity of fuelconsume s nce e as r p compu er zero rese .

Distance travelled: calculated since the last trip computer zerorese .

Distance remaining to the destination: calculated ith referenceto the final destination, entered by the user. If guidance is activatedthe navigation system calculates it as a current value.

verage spee : s s e average spee cacu a e s nce e as

trip computer zero reset (ignition on).

ac press o e u on a e en o e wpers s a spays evar ous r p compu er a a n success on, accor ng o e sp ay.

09

1 5 1

1

53

1





22

4

23

2

23

4

4

1. Volume increase.

. Volume decrease.

. uccessve presses mute restore t e soun .

4. Rotation - associated with a pop-up.a o - access t e store statons: g er or prevous.usc p ayers: prev ousnext trac .

5. Radio: next/previous station.Music players: next track.

1. Press.epeat t e current spo en navgat on nstruct on.

2. Short press to make a telephone call.Pick up/Hang up.

Access the telephone menu.Display the call list.ong press to re ect an ncomng ca .

3. PersonalisationShort press to confirm the choice made using the dial.

4. Rotation.Movement on the call list in the phone book.Personalisation selection.

1. Short press: provides access to the menu according to thespay on t e screen.

2. Successive presses: provides access according to theurrent sp ay on t e screen.

MAP/NAV (if navigation is in progress), TELa conversaton s n progress , or MEDIA in

rogress, r p computer.Long press: switch to black screen - Dark (night driving).ouc ng a contro restores t e spay.

3. ESC: abandon the current operation.

4. Rotation: selects the access to the short-cut menusccording to the current display.

5. Confirms the choice displayed on the screen.

09

4





LIST

MENU

3

5

9

10

11

1

2

. uccessve presses: ac ane mo e -ac screen ng t r vng .

. ort press to ma e a te ep one ca .c up ang up.ccess t e teep one menu.

Display the call list.Long press to reject an incoming call.

. otaton: prov es access to t e s ort-cut menus accor ng to t e spay on t e screen.ort press: con rm t e c o ce spaye on t e screen.

ong press: return to t e ma n menu.

. ort press: a an on t e current operaton.e ect an ncom ng ca .ong press: return to t e n t a spay.

. enu: prov es access to t e man menu.

6. VOL +: volume increase.

. -: vo ume ecrease.

.uccess ve presses: mute restore soun .

9. Short press: Radio: higher frequency.Music players: next track.Long press for fast play.

0. Short press: Radio: lower frequency.Music players: previous track.Long press for fast play.

1. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or the list of tracks, albums,irectories.

Long press: update the list of stations received.

Press: repeat the current navigationinstruction.

Successive presses: selection of the typeof information present on the screen.

10

1

2

1

2

3

3

2

3

1

2

3

3

2

"RADIO" MENU

MAIN FUNCTION

c o ce

choice A2

...

DISPLAY FLOW CHARTS

"MUSIC" MENU

SELECT MUSIC

balance/fader

WAVEBAND

AM



24

1

2

3

4

4

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

3

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

"TRAFFIC" MENU

ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE


GEOGRAPHICAL FILTER

none

w n m es m

within 3 miles (5 km)

within 6 miles (10 km)

w n m es m

bass/treble

equa zer

none

classical

azz

rock/pop

echno

voca

loudness

initialise sound settings

MANUAL TUNE

balance/fader

bass/treble

equa zer

none

classical

azz

rock/pop

echno

voca

loudness

initialise sound settings

1

2

4

2

3

4

2

4

4

3

2 4

4

4

3

4

4

2

rou e ype

fast route

short route

optm se route

STOPOVERS

a s opover

address input

navigate HOME

c oose rom a ress oo

choose from last destinations

"NAVIGATION" MENU

DESTINATION INPUT

address input

country

city SETTINGS



34

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

rearrange rou e

repace s opover

delete stopover

recalculate

ast route

short route

optimised route

street

num er

start route guidance

post code

a to a ress oo

intersection

city district

geo post on

AP

navigate HOME

c oose rom a ress oo

choose from last destinations

POI nearby

POI near destination

n c y

POI in country

POI near route

route dynamics

ra c n epen ent

semi-dynamic

avoidance criteria

avo motorways

avoid toll roads

avoid ferries

reca cua e

1

2

1

2

2

3

4

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

"TELEPHONE" MENU SETUP

DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK

CALL LIST

search phone

deutsch

english

espano

rançais

dark blue

co our

day mode for map

night mode for map

auto. ayn g t or

VEHICLE PARAMETERS



26

3

4

3

4

4

4

4

4

2

3

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

4

4

4

3

2

3

2

4

4

4

4

3

4

4

4

3

3

3

phones connected

sconnect p one

rename phone

delete pairing

eete a par ngs

show details

SETTINGS

seec r ng one

phone/ring tone volume

enter mailbox number

italiano

ne er an s

polski

por uguese

set date and time

date format

me orma

DISPLAY

brightness

co our

pop titanium

offee

ue stee

echnogrey

vehicle information

a ert og

status of functions

UNITS

empera ure

celsius

fahrenheit

s ance

km and l/100

km and km/l

m es m an

SYSTEM PARAMETERS

actory reset

so ware verson

automatic scrolling

sound quality betweenthe different audiosources (radio, CD,

CD changer...).

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted tothe sources listened to. It is advisable to setthe AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear

Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middleposition, select the musical ambience "None"


hich may result in audible differences when changing source(radio, CD, CD changer...).

e a e e ow groups oge er e answers o e mos requen y as e ques ons concern ng e y ay.

QUESTION ANSWER




an se e ou ness correc on o e c vepos on n mo e or o e nac ve pos onn ra o mo e.




- Check the content in the case of a recorded

CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.- e au o equ pmen s p ayer oes nop ay s.

- ue o na equa e qua y, cer a n recor eCDs will not be played by the audio system.

- The CD changer does not play MP3 CDs.


The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is notrecognised by the audio equipment.


Insert good quality CDs and store them insuitable conditions.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.

e au o equpmen se ngs ass, re e, am ences are unsu a e. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selectinan ambience.

SOLUTION ANSWER

e qua y o recep onof the radio stationlistened to graduallydeteriorates or thestored stations donot function (nosound, 87.5 Mhz isdisplayed...).

e ve c e s oo ar rom e ransm er use y e s a on s ene o orere s no ransm er n e geograp ca area roug w c e ve c e

is travelling.


c va e e unc on o ena e e sys emto check whether there is a more powerfultransmitter in the geographical area.




28

e aer a s a sen or as een amage or examp e w en gongthrough a car wash or into an underground car park).

Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.

Sound cut-outs of1 to 2 seconds in radiomode.


Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenons oo requen an a ways on e same rou e.

With the engine off,the audio equipmentsw c es o a er a ewminutes of use.

When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating timedepends on the battery charge.

e sw c -o s norma: e au o equ pmen sw c es o economy mo eand switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.


QUESTION SOLUTION ANSWER

eox s c e . owever,

certain traffic jamsalong the route are notindicated in real time.

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive thetraffic information.

Wait until the traffic information is being receivedcorrectly (displaying of the traffic informationsymbols on the map).

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, ...) are listed for thetraffic information.

The time taken tocalculate a routesometimes seemslonger than usual

This phenomenon is normal. The system isdependent on the traffic information available.

The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVDis being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is beingcalculated.

Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stopthe copying before starting the guidance functio



longer than usual.

e a u e s nospaye .

n s ar ng, e n a sa on o e may a e up o m nu es oreceve more an sa e es correc y.

a un e sys em as s ar e up compe ey.ec a ere s a coverage o a eas

4 satellites (long press on the MENU button, theselect AUDIO/TELEPHONE DIAGNOSTICS, thGPS COVERAGE).

epen ng on e geograp ca env ronmen unne, ... or e wea er,the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary

s p enomenon s norma. e sys em sdependent on the conditions of reception of the

Citroen C5 Owners Handbook 1

Documents

Transcript of Citroen C5 Owners Handbook 1